Guest

Cisco IOS Software Releases 12.3 Mainline

MPLS Label Switch Controller and Enhancements

Table Of Contents

MPLS Label Switch Controller and Enhancements

Changing from Tag-Switching to MPLS Terminology

Feature Overview

MPLS LSC Functional Description

Using Controlled ATM Switch Ports as Router Interfaces

How the LSC, ATM Switch, and VSI Work Together

MPLS LSC Benefits

MPLS LSC Restrictions

Related Documents

Platforms Supported by MPLS LSC

Supported Routing Protocols on LC-ATM and MPLS LSC

Supported Standards, MIBs, and RFCs

Configuration Tasks

Configuring the 7200 Series LSCs for BPX and IGX Switches

Verifying the MPLS LSC Configuration

Configuration Example: MPLS LSC

Configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch and RPM-PR as an MPLS LSC

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR Overview

Comparing Cisco 7200 LSC Configuration with Cisco RPM-PR LSC Configuration

Comparing Edge Label Switch Router Configurations

Configuring the Cisco MGX RPM-PR

Configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch with RPM-PR to Perform Basic LSC Operations

Configuration Steps: Adding an MPLS Controller to the PXM-45

Configuration Steps: Mapping an AXSM Port to an XtagATM Interface on the LSC

Configuration Steps: Configuring an RPM as an Edge Label Switch Router

MGX ATM MPLS Configuration Examples

PVP-Based ATM MPLS Network Configuration

Simple PVC-Based Packet MPLS Network Configuration

Configuring the Cisco 6400 Universal Access Concentrator as an MPLS LSC

Cisco 6400 UAC Architectural Overview

Configuring Permanent Virtual Circuits and Permanent Virtual Paths

Control VC Setup for MPLS LSC Functions

Configuring the Cisco 6400 UAC to Perform Basic MPLS LSC Operations

Configuration Steps: Configuring Cisco 6400 UAC NRP as an MPLS LSC

Configuration Steps: Configuring the Cisco 6400 UAC NSP for MPLS Connectivity to the BPX Switch

Configuration Example: Configuring a Cisco 6400 NRP as an LSC

Configuring the Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a Universal Router Module as an MPLS ATM-LSR

Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a Universal Router Module Overview

Configuration Example: Configuring a Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a URM as an MPLS ATM-LSR

Disabling the LSC from Acting as an Edge LSR

Feature 1: Creating Virtual Trunks

Typical ATM Hybrid Network with Virtual Trunks

Virtual Trunking Benefits

Virtual Trunking Restrictions

Configuration Example: Configuring Virtual Trunks with Cisco 7200 LSCs

Configuration for LSC1 Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

Configuration for LSC2 Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for Edge LSR1

Configuration for Edge LSR2

Configuration Example: Configuring Virtual Trunking on Cisco 6400 NRP LSCs

Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NSP

Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NRP LSC1 Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

Configuration for 6400 UAC NRP LSC2 Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for Edge LSR1

Configuration for Edge LSR2

Feature 2: Using LSC Redundancy

Hot LSC Redundancy

Warm LSC Redundancy

Differences Between Hot and Warm LSC Redundancy

General Redundancy Operational Modes

How LSC Redundancy Differs from Router and Switch Redundancy

LSC Redundancy

Router Redundancy

ATM, Frame Relay, and Circuit Switch Redundancy

General Hot/Warm Standby Redundancy in Switches

LSC Redundancy Benefits

LSC Redundancy Restrictions

Configuring LSC Redundancy

Partitioning the Resources of the ATM Switch

Implementing the Parallel VSI Model

Adding Interface Redundancy

Configuration Example: Configuring LSC Hot Redundancy

Configuration for LSC 1A

Configuration for LSC 1B

Configuration for LSC 2A

Configuration for LSC 2B

Configuration for BPX-1 and BPX-2

Configuration for Edge LSR 7200-1

Configuration for Edge LSR-1

Configuration for Edge LSR-2

Configuration for Edge LSR 7200-2

Configuration Example: Configuring LSC Warm Standby Redundancy

Configuration Example: Configuring an Interface Using Two VSI Partitions

Feature 3: Reducing the Number of Label Switch Paths Created in an MPLS Network

Using an Access List to Disable Creation of LSPs to Destination IP Addresses

Using a Numbered Access List

Using a Named Access List

Specifying Exact Match IP Addresses with an Access List

Configuration Example: Using an Access List to Limit Headend VCs

Configuration for LSC 1

Configuration for BPX 1 and BPX 2

Configuration for LSC 2

Configuration for Edge LSR 1

Configuration for Edge LSR 2

Feature 4: Differentiated Services and MPLS QoS Multi-VCs

Differentiated Services and Quality of Service

DiffServ Per-Hop Behaviors

DiffServ Classes and Cisco IP+ATM Switches

Requirements for Differential Services Approach to QoS

Configuring Multi-VCs

Setting Up LVCs

Optionally Setting the MPLS Experimental Field Value

Configuring MPLS QoS in the Core of an ATM Network

Configuring Queuing Functions on Router Output Interfaces

Setting the ATM-CLP Bit on Enhanced ATM Port Adapter Interfaces

Verifying MPLS QoS Operation

Configuration Examples

QoS Support

Feature 5: MPLS VC Merge

Feature Overview

VC Merge Benefits

VC Merge Restrictions

VC Merge Hardware and Software Requirements

Related VC Merge Docs

Configuration

Feature 6: MPLS Diff-Serv-Aware Traffic Engineering over ATM

Guaranteed Bandwidth Service Configuration

Feature 7: MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

Prerequisites for MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

Restrictions for MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

How to Configure MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

Troubleshooting Tips

Configuration Examples for MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

OAM Management with MPLS Subinterfaces Example

OAM Management with Switch Subinterfaces on Route Processor Modules Example

OAM Management with XtagATM Subinterfaces on Label Switch Controllers Example

Feature 8: Troubleshooting the MPLS LSC Network with the LVC Path Trace Feature

Prerequisites for the LVC Path Trace Feature

Restriction for the LVC Path Trace Feature

Tracing the Path of an LVC

Starting Up the Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 and Cisco MGX AXSM

Before Startup

Access Privileges

Booting Order and Cautions

File and Directory Names Are Case Sensitive

Flash Command vs. Bootflash Command

Upgrade Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 Card First

Set Boot IP Address in Every Switch

Image File Formats

Copying the Images from the TFTP Server

Upgrading the PXM-45 and AXSM Images

Verifying the IOS Files on the PXM-45 E:Drive

Command Reference

Command Conventions

CLI Command Summary

debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

debug mpls xtagatm errors

debug mpls xtagatm events

debug mpls xtagatm vc

debug vsi api

debug vsi errors

debug vsi events

debug vsi packets

debug vsi param-groups

extended-port

interface xtagatm

mpls atm control-vc

mpls atm cos

mpls atm disable-headend-vc

mpls ldp atm vc-merge

mpls atm vpi

mpls atm vp-tunnel

mpls request-labels for

oam-pvc

oam retry

show atm vc

show controllers vsi control-interface

show controllers vsi descriptor

show controllers vsi session

show controllers vsi status

show controllers vsi traffic

show controllers xtagatm

show interface xtagatm

show mpls atm-ldp bindings

show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

show mpls atm-ldp capability

show mpls atm-ldp summary

show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm

show xtagatm cross-connect

show xtagatm vc

tag-control-protocol vsi

Glossary


MPLS Label Switch Controller and Enhancements


This document describes the Cisco Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Label Switch Controller (LSC). It describes the MPLS LSC feature, identifies the platforms supported by the MPLS LSC, provides configuration examples for MPLS LSC components, and describes related IOS commands that can be used with the supported platforms.

Feature History for MPLS Label Switch Controller and Enhancements

Release
Modification
11.1CT

This document was introduced as the Tag Switch Controller.

12.0(3)T

Added references to the Cisco IOS switching services documentation.

12.0(5)T

Added support for multi-VCs.

12.0(7)DC

Added support for the Cisco 6400 UAC.
Added support for virtual trunking/tunneling.
Added support for dedicated LSC with the command
mpls atm disable-headend-vc.

12.1(3)T

Added support for LSC redundancy.

12.1(5)T

Added access list support for controlling the creation of label switch paths with the command mpls request-labels for.

Added support for Cisco IGX 8410, 8420, and 8430 switches.

Removed support for the 7500 router as an MPLS LSC.

12.2(4)T

Changed tag-switching commands and terminology to MPLS format.

Added support for Cisco MGX 8850 switch with the Cisco MGX RPM-PR card as an MPLS LSC.

Added DiffServ with MPLS QoS multi-VC feature support.

Added the vci-range keyword to the mpls atm vpi and mpls atm vp-tunnel commands.

Extended the VPI range from 256 to 4095.

12.2(8)T1

Added support for the Cisco 8400 IGX Switch with a Universal Router Module as an MPLS ATM-LSR.

Added support for the VC merge and MPLS Diff-Serv-aware features.

12.3(2)T

Added support for the MPLS OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM feature.

Modified the oam-pvc and oam retry commands.

12.3(2)T6

Added the LVC Path Trace feature.

Added the path keyword to the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command.

12.3(9)

This feature was integrated into 12.3(9).


Finding Support Information for Platforms and Cisco IOS Software Images

Use Cisco Feature Navigator to find information about platform support and Cisco IOS software image support. Access Cisco Feature Navigator at http://www.cisco.com/go/fn. You must have an account on Cisco.com. If you do not have an account or have forgotten your username or password, click Cancel at the login dialog box and follow the instructions that appear.

Document Organization

This document is organized as follows. The following sections describe MPLS LSC in general:

Feature Overview

Platforms Supported by MPLS LSC

Supported Standards, MIBs, and RFCs

Configuration Tasks

The following sections describe MPLS LSC features. Each section contains its own configuration steps and examples:

Feature 1: Creating Virtual Trunks

Feature 2: Using LSC Redundancy

Feature 3: Reducing the Number of Label Switch Paths Created in an MPLS Network

Feature 4: Differentiated Services and MPLS QoS Multi-VCs

Feature 5: MPLS VC Merge

Feature 6: MPLS Diff-Serv-Aware Traffic Engineering over ATM

Feature 7: MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

Feature 8: Troubleshooting the MPLS LSC Network with the LVC Path Trace Feature

The following section provides additional information for the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR:

Starting Up the Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 and Cisco MGX AXSM

The following sections describe commands used throughout the book:

Command Reference

Glossary

Changing from Tag-Switching to MPLS Terminology

Cisco is moving from tag-switching to MPLS, because MPLS is compliant with the IETF standard. This change necessitates terminology and command changes. Table 1 lists the old tag-switching terms and the equivalent MPLS terms used in this document. Table 8 lists the changes made to commands.

Table 1 Equivalency Table for Tag-Switching and MPLS Terms  

Old Tag Switching Terminology
New MPLS Terminology

Tag Switching

MPLS, Multiprotocol Label Switching

Tag (short for Tag Switching)

MPLS

TDP (Tag Distribution Protocol)

LDP (Label Distribution Protocol)

Cisco TDP and LDP (MPLS Label Distribution Protocol) are nearly identical in function, but use incompatible message formats and some different procedures. Cisco is changing from TDP to a fully compliant LDP.

Tag Switched

Label Switched

TFIB (Tag Forwarding Information Base)

LFIB (Label Forwarding Information Base)

TSR (Tag Switching Router)

LSR (Label Switching Router)

TSC (Tag Switch Controller)

LSC (Label Switch Controller)

ATM-TSR (ATM Tag Switch Router)

ATM-LSR (ATM Label Switch Router, such as the Cisco BPX 8650 switch)

TVC (Tag VC, Tag Virtual Circuit)

LVC (Label VC, Label Virtual Circuit)

TSP (Tag Switch Path)

LSP (Label Switch Path)


Feature Overview

The MPLS label switch controller (LSC), combined with the slave ATM switch, supports scalable integration of IP services over an ATM network. The MPLS LSC enables the slave ATM switch to:

Participate in an MPLS network

Directly peer with IP routers

Support the IP and MPLS features in Cisco IOS software

The MPLS LSC supports highly scalable integration of MPLS (IP+ATM) services by using a direct peer relationship between the ATM switch and MPLS routers. This direct peer relationship removes the limitation on the number of IP edge routers (typical of traditional IP-over-ATM networks), allowing service providers to meet growing demands for IP services. The MPLS LSC also supports direct and rapid implementation of advanced IP and MPLS services over ATM networks using ATM switches.

MPLS combines the performance and virtual circuit capabilities of Layer 2 (data link layer) switching with the scalability of Layer 3 (network layer) routing capabilities. This combination enables service providers to deliver solutions for managing growth, providing differentiated services, and leveraging existing networking infrastructures.

The MPLS LSC architecture provides the flexibility to:

Run MPLS applications over Layer 2 technologies

Support any Layer 3 protocol while scaling the network to meet future needs

By deploying the MPLS LSC across large enterprise networks or wide area networks, customers can:

Save money by using existing ATM infrastructures

Grow revenue using MPLS-enabled services

Increase productivity through enhanced network scalability and performance

MPLS LSC Functional Description

The MPLS LSC is a label switch router (LSR) that is configured to control the operation of a separate ATM switch. Together, the MPLS LSC and the controlled ATM switch function as a single ATM label switch router (ATM-LSR).

Figure 1 shows the functional relationship between the MPLS LSC and the ATM switch that it controls.

Figure 1 MPLS Label Switch Controller and Controlled ATM Switch

The following routers can function as an MPLS LSC:

Cisco 7200 series router

Cisco 6400 Universal Access Concentrator (UAC)

The following ATM switches can function with the Cisco 7200 series router as the controlled ATM switch:

Cisco BPX 8600, 8650 (which includes a Cisco 7204 router), and 8680

Cisco IGX 8410, 8420, and 8430

Also, the Cisco MGX 8850 switch with a Cisco MGX 8850 Route Processor Module (RPM-PR) can function as an MPLS ATM-LSR.

The MPLS LSC controls the ATM switch by means of the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI), which runs over an ATM link connecting the two devices.

The dotted line in Figure 1 represents the logical boundaries of the external interfaces of the MPLS LSC and the controlled ATM switch, as discovered by the IP routing topology. The controlled ATM switch provides one or more XTagATM interfaces at this external boundary. The MPLS LSC can incorporate other label-controlled or nonlabel-controlled router interfaces.

Using Controlled ATM Switch Ports as Router Interfaces

The XTagATM ports on the LSC are used as an IOS interface type called extended Label ATM (XTagATM). To associate these XTagATM interfaces with particular physical interfaces on the controlled ATM switch, use the interface configuration command extended-port.

Figure 2 shows a typical MPLS LSC configuration that controls three ATM ports on a Cisco BPX switch: ports 6.1, 6.2, and 12.2. These corresponding XTagATM interfaces were created on the MPLS LSC and associated with the corresponding ATM ports on the Cisco BPX switch by means of the extended-port command.

Figure 2 Typical MPLS LSC and BPX Switch Configuration

Observe from Figure 2 that:

An additional port on the Cisco BPX switch (port 12.1) acts as the switch control port.

An ATM interface (ATM1/0) on the MPLS LSC acts as the master control port.

How the LSC, ATM Switch, and VSI Work Together

The LSC and slave ATM switch have the following characteristics:

The LSC runs all of the control protocols.

The ATM switch forwards the data.

Each physical interface on the slave ATM switch maps to an XTagATM interface on the LSC. Each XTagATM interface is configured to have a dedicated LDP session with a corresponding interface on an edge or core device. The XTagATM interfaces are mapped in the routing topology, and the ATM switch behaves as a router.

The LSC can also function as an Edge LSR. The data for the Edge LSR passes through the control interface of the router.

If a component on the LSC fails, the ATM switch's IP switching function is disabled. The standalone LSC is the single point of failure.

The VSI implementation includes the following characteristics:

The VSI allows multiple, independent control planes to control a switch. The VSI ensures that the control processes (SS7, MPLS, PNNI, and so on) can act independently of each other by using a VSI slave process to control the resources of the switch and apportion them to the correct control planes.

In MPLS, each physical interface on the slave ATM switch maps to an XTagATM interface on the LSC through the VSI. In other words, physical interfaces are mapped to their respective logical interfaces.

The routing protocol on the LSC generates route tables entries. The master sends connection requests and connection release requests to the slave based on routing table entries.

The slave sends the configured bandwidth parameters for the ATM switch interface to the master in the VSI messages. The master includes the bandwidth information in the link state topology. You can override these bandwidth values by manually configuring the bandwidth on the XTagATM interfaces on the LSC.

MPLS LSC Benefits

Using the MPLS LSC provides the following benefits:

IP-ATM Integration—Enables ATM switches to directly support advanced IP and MPLS services and protocols, thereby reducing operational costs and bandwidth requirements, while at the same time decreasing time-to-market for new services.

Virtual Private Networks (VPNs)—Supports IP-based VPNs on an integrated IP+ATM backbone or a gigabit router backbone.

The following services over an ATM MPLS network:

Any Transport over MPLS (AToM) services

Diff-Serve traffic enginneering services

LLSP-based Diff-Serve multi-vc MPLS services

Layer 3 MPLS VPN services

MPLS LSC Restrictions

Supporting ATM Forum Protocols—You can connect the MPLS LSC to a network that is running ATM Forum protocols while the MPLS LSC simultaneously performs its functions. However, you must connect the ATM Forum network through a separate ATM interface (that is, not through the master control port).

Cannot Use the MPLS LSC as an Edge Router—Using the MPLS LSC as a label edge device is not supported. Using the MPLS LSC as a label edge device introduces unnecessary complexity to the network design, configuration, and performance. See "Disabling the LSC from Acting as an Edge LSR" section to disable edge LSR functionality on the LSC.

Using Static Routes in the ATM MPLS network: When you create static routes in the ATM MPLS network, if the forwarding router is a LSC, it must be a next-hop router to the ingress router. If the forwarding router is an ATM edge router, it can be located anywhere in the network. When creating static routes with the following command, the forwarding router's address can be a PE router's address.

ip route destination-prefix destination-mask forwarding-router's-address

Note Configuring static routes on the LSC is not supported.


Enable CEF on the control ATM interface: When you configure the control ATM interface for an XtagATM interface, enable CEF switching on that interface. Issue the ip route cache command cef to enable CEF.

Related Documents

The following documents provide more information about MPLS features:

MPLS QoS Multi-VC Mode for PA-A3

MPLS Label Distribution Protocol

Using OAM for PVC Management

Troubleshooting PVC Failures When Using OAM Cells and PVC Management

The following documents provide more information about platform-specific features:

Cisco 6400 UAC

Configuring Multiprotocol Label Switching on the Cisco 6400 UAC

Cisco BPX 8600 Series Switches

Cisco MPLS Controller Software Configuration Guide, Version 9.3.0 and 9.3.10

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switches

Update to the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation and Configuration Guide and Cisco IGX 8400 Series Reference Guide, Version 9.3.0

Update to the Cisco IGX 8400 Series Reference Guide, Version 9.3.0

Cisco MGX 8850 Route Processor Module

Cisco MGX Route Processor Module Installation and Configuration Guide, Version 2.1

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Switches with a URM

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation Guide

Cisco IGX 8400 Series Provisioning Guide

Platforms Supported by MPLS LSC

Routers

You can use the following routers to configure an ATM-LSR:

Cisco 7200 series routers—Support the following interface:

ATM Port Adapter (PA-A1 and PA-A3)

Cisco 6400 Universal Access Concentrator—Supports the following interfaces:

DS-3

OC-3/STM-1

OC-12/STM-4

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR as an LSC

Switches

You can use the following ATM switches to configure an ATM-LSR:

Cisco BPX 8600, 8650, and 8680 switches

Cisco IGX 8410, 8420, and 8430 switches with the Cisco 7200 series routers

Switches with Router Modules

You can also use the following switches with router modules as ATM-LSRs:

Cisco MGX 8850 switch with the Cisco 8850 Route Processor Module (RPM-PR)

Cisco IGX 8410, 8420, and 8430 switches with a Universal Router Module (URM)

Supported Routing Protocols on LC-ATM and MPLS LSC

The followng protocols are supported on the LC-ATM and MPLS LSC:

OSPF

ISIS

Supported Standards, MIBs, and RFCs

Standards

No new or modified standards are supported by this feature.

MIBs

No new or modified MIBs are supported by this feature.

To locate and download MIBs for selected platforms, Cisco IOS releases, and feature sets, use Cisco MIB Locator found at the following URL:

http://www.cisco.com/go/mibs

RFCs:

RFC 3031, Multiprotocol Label Switching Architecture

RFC 3036, LDP Specification

RFC 3035, MPLS using LDP and ATM VC Switching

Configuration Tasks

See the following for examples of basic configuration tasks for enabling MPLS LSC functionality:

Configuring the 7200 Series LSCs for BPX and IGX Switches

Configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch and RPM-PR as an MPLS LSC

Configuring the Cisco 6400 Universal Access Concentrator as an MPLS LSC

Configuring the Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a Universal Router Module as an MPLS ATM-LSR

Disabling the LSC from Acting as an Edge LSR

Refer to the Cisco BPX 8600 or IGX 8400 series switch documentation for BPX/IGX switch configuration examples.

Configuring the 7200 Series LSCs for BPX and IGX Switches

To enable MPLS functionality on the Cisco 7200 series routers connected to BPX and IGX switches, perform the following steps on each LSC in the configuration.


Note If you are configuring for LSC redundancy, ensure that the controller ID matches the slave and is unique to the LSC system. Also, make sure that the VPI/VCI value for the control VC matches its peer


.

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

Router(config)# interface 
loopback0
Router(config-if)# ip address 
172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
Router(config-if)# exit

Creates a software-only loopback interface that emulates an interface that is always up. Specify an interface number for the loopback interface. There is no limit on the number of loopback interfaces you can create.

Assigns an IP address to Loopback0. It is important that all loopback addresses in an MPLS network are host addresses, that is, with a mask of 255.255.255.255. Using a shorter mask can prevent MPLS-based VPN services from working correctly.

Step 2 

Router(config)# mpls atm 
disable-headend-vc

Prevents the router from assigning headend VCs for each destination prefix. With downstream on demand, MPLS ATM networks LVCs are a limited resource that are easily depleted with the addition of each new node.

Step 3 

Router(config)# interface atm1/0
Router(config-if)# tag-control-pro
tocol vsi id 1

Creates an ATM interface (atm1/0).

Configures a Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) on (atm1/0). The VSI ID is 1. The VSI ID must match the controller ID you assign to the ATM switch.

For the IGX switch, use tag-control-protocol vsi slaves 32 id 1

Step 4 

Router(config-if)# interface 
XTagATM61
Router(config-if)# ip route-cache 
cef
Router(config-if)# extended-port 
atm1/0 bpx 6.1

Creates an XTagATM interface (XTagATM61.)

Enables CEF on the XTagATM interface.

Associates the XTagATM interface with an external interface (BPX port 6.1) on the remotely controlled ATM switch atm1/0 identifies the ATM interface used to control the remote ATM switch.

For the IGX switch, use the extended-port atm1/0 descriptor 0.6.1.0 or extended-port atm1/0 igx command.

Step 5 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
loopback0

Makes XTagATM61 an unnumbered interface and use the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute. The interfaces in an ATM MPLS network should usually be unnumbered. This reduces the number of IP destination-prefixes in the routing table, which reduces the number of labels and LVCs used in the network.

Step 6 

Router(config-if)# mpls ip 
Router(config-if)# mpls atm 
vpi 2-5
Router(config-if)# exit

Enables MPLS on the XTagATM interface.

Limits the range of VPIs so that the total does not exceed 4 between an Edge LSR and an LSC. For example:
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm vpi 10-13

The VPI range total can be 12 or 13 between LSCs. The range depends on how many VCs the interface can support.

Step 7 

Router(config-if)# interface 
XTagATM1222
Router(config-if)# extended-port 
atm1/0 bpx 12.2.2

Configures MPLS on another XTagATM virtual interface and binds it to BPX virtual trunk interface 12.2.2.

For the Cisco IGX switch, use extended-port atm1/0 descriptor 0.12.2.2 or extended-port atm1/0 igx.

Step 8 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
loopback0

Makes XTagATM1222 an unnumbered interface and use the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute. The interfaces in an ATM MPLS network should usually be unnumbered. This reduces the number of IP destination-prefixes in the routing table, which reduces the number of labels and LVCs used in the network.

Step 9 

Router(config-if)# mpls atm 
vp-tunnel 2
Router(config-if)# mpls ip 
Router(config-if)# exit

Enables MPLS on the XTagATM interface using a VP-tunnel interface.

This will limit the VPI to only vpi = 2. The command will also map the label ATM control VC to 2,32.

Step 10 

Router(config)# ip cef 

Enables Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF).

Step 11 

Router(config)# ip routing
Router(config)# router OSPF 100

Enables IP routing.

Enables the OSPF routing protocol. Alternatively, you can enable the IS-IS routing protocol (router isis).

Verifying the MPLS LSC Configuration

The following sections explain some of the commands you can use to ensure that you have configured MPLS correctly.

Check that the Switch Control Port Is Active

Enter the show controllers vsi status command to show the switch control port is active. If an interface has been discovered by the LSC, but an XTagATM interface has not been associated with it through the extended-port configuration command, then the interface name is marked <unknown>, and interface status is marked n/a.

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi status command:

Router# show controllers vsi status
Interface Name                  IF Status   IFC State  Physical Descriptor
switch control port                   n/a      ACTIVE  12.1.0
XTagATM0                               up      ACTIVE  12.2.0
XTagATM1                               up      ACTIVE  12.3.0
<unknown>                             n/a  FAILED-EXT  12.4.0

Check that VSI Sessions Are Established

Make sure that every VSI session has been established. A session consists of an exchange of VSI messages between the VSI master (the LSC) and a VSI slave (an entity on the switch). There can be multiple VSI slaves for a switch. On the ATM switch, each port or trunk card assumes the role of a VSI slave.

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi session command. Session State indicates the status of the session between the master and the slave.

ESTABLISHED is the fully operational steady state.

UNKNOWN indicates that the slave is not responding.

Router# show controllers vsi session 
Interface    Session  VCD    VPI/VCI    Switch/Slave Ids   Session State   
ATM0/0       0        1      0/40       0/1                ESTABLISHED  
ATM0/0       1        2      0/41       0/2                ESTABLISHED
ATM0/0       2        3      0/42       0/3                DISCOVERY
ATM0/0       3        4      0/43       0/4                RESYNC-STARTING 
ATM0/0       4        5      0/44       0/5                RESYNC-STOPPING 
ATM0/0       5        6      0/45       0/6                RESYNC-UNDERWAY
ATM0/0       6        7      0/46       0/7                UNKNOWN
ATM0/0       7        8      0/47       0/8                UNKNOWN
ATM0/0       8        9      0/48       0/9                CLOSING
ATM0/0       9        10     0/49       0/10               ESTABLISHED
ATM0/0       10       11     0/50       0/11               ESTABLISHED
ATM0/0       11       12     0/51       0/12               ESTABLISHED

Check that the VSI Is Operational

To display information about the switch interface discovered by the MPLS LSC through VSI, use the show controllers vsi descriptor EXEC command. The field called IFC state shows the operational state of the interface, according to the switch. It should be ACTIVE.

Router# show controllers vsi descriptor 12.2.0
Phys desc: 12.2.0
Log intf:  0x000C0200 (0.12.2.0)
Interface: XTagATM0
IF status: up                   IFC state: ACTIVE
Min VPI:   1                    Maximum cell rate:  10000
Max VPI:   259                  Available channels: 2000
Min VCI:   32                   Available cell rate (forward):  10000
Max VCI:   65535                Available cell rate (backward): 10000

Check XTagATM Interfaces

Ensure that the control VC 0/32 has been created to carry non-IP traffic (LDP) on every XTagATM interface. The columns marked VCD, VPI, and VCI display information for the corresponding private VC on the control interface. The private VC connects the XTagATM VC to the external switch. It is termed private because its VPI and VCI are only used for communication between the MPLS LSC and the switch, and it is different from the VPI and VCI seen on the XTagATM interface and the corresponding switch port.

Router# show XTagatm vc

AAL / Control Interface

Interface     VCD   VPI   VCI Type  Encapsulation  VCD   VPI   VCI Status
XTagATM0        1     0    32  PVC  AAL5-SNAP        2     0    33 ACTIVE
XTagATM0        2     1    33  TVC  AAL5-MUX         4     0    37 ACTIVE
XTagATM0        3     1    34  TVC  AAL5-MUX         6     0    39 ACTIVE

To gather more information about the XTagATM interface, enter the show interface XTagATM command:

Router# show interface XTagATM0
XTagATM0 is up, line protocol is up 
  Hardware is TAG-Controlled Switch Port
  Interface is unnumbered.  Using address of Loopback0 (10.0.0.17)
  MTU 4470 bytes, BW 156250 Kbit, DLY 80 usec, rely 255/255, load 1/255
  Encapsulation ATM Labelswitching, loopback not set
  Encapsulation(s): AAL5
  Control interface: ATM1/0, switch port: bpx 10.2
  9 terminating VCs, 16 switch cross-connects
  Switch port traffic:
     129302 cells input, 127559 cells output
  Last input 00:00:04, output never, output hang never
  Last clearing of "show interface" counters never
  Queueing strategy: fifo
  Output queue 0/0, 0 drops; input queue 0/75, 0 drops
  Terminating traffic:
  5 minute input rate 1000 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec
  5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec
     61643 packets input, 4571695 bytes, 0 no buffer
     Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants
     0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored, 0 abort
     53799 packets output, 4079127 bytes, 0 underruns
     0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets
     0 output buffers copied, 0 interrupts, 0 failures

Check that LDP Is Operational

The show mpls ldp discovery privileged EXEC command displays the interfaces over which the LDP discovery process is running. Each interface should display a status of "xmit/recv", which means the LSC is sending and receiving LDP messages.

Router# show mpls ldp discovery

Local LDP Identifier:
8.1.1.1:0
Discovery Sources:
Interfaces:
Ethernet1/1/3 (ldp): xmit/recv
            LDP Id: 172.73.0.77:0
            LDP Id: 172.16.0.44:0
            LDP Id: 172.22.0.55:0
ATM3/0.1 (ldp): xmit/recv
            LDP Id: 192.168.7.7:2
ATM0/0.2 (tdp): xmit/recv
            TDP Id: 192.168.0.1:1
Targeted Hellos:
10.1.1.1 -> 172.44.0.33 (ldp): active, xmit/recv
            LDP Id: 172.44.0.33:0
10.1.1.1 -> 192.168.0.16 (tdp): passive, xmit/recv
TDP Id: 192.168.0.33:0

To display the status of LDP sessions, issue the show mpls ldp neighbor privileged EXEC command. The output should show that the LDP sessions are operational and sending and receiving messages.

Router# show mpls ldp neighbor

Peer LDP Ident: 192.1680.7.7:2; Local LDP Ident 8.1.1.1:1
        TCP connection: 192.168.7.7.11032 - 8.1.1.1.646
        State: Oper; Msgs sent/rcvd: 5855/6371; Downstream on demand
        Up time: 13:15:09
        LDP discovery sources:
          ATM3/0.1
Peer LDP Ident: 10.1.1.1:0; Local LDP Ident 10.1.1.1:0
        TCP connection: 10.1.1.1.646 - 10.1.1.1.11006
        State: Oper; Msgs sent/rcvd: 4/411; Downstream
        Up time: 00:00:52
        LDP discovery sources:
          Ethernet1/0/0
        Addresses bound to peer LDP Ident:
          10.0.0.29        10.1.1.1         109.0.0.199      172.102.1.1
          10.205.0.9 

Check that MPLS and LDP Are Operational

Make sure that MPLS is globally enabled and that a label distribution protocol is running on the requested interfaces by issuing the show mpls interfaces command.

Router# show mpls interfaces 
Interface              IP            Tunnel   Operational
(...)    
Serial0/1.1            Yes (ldp)     Yes      Yes         
Serial0/1.2            Yes           Yes      No          
Serial0/1.3            Yes (ldp)     Yes      Yes         
(...)

The IP field shows that MPLS IP is configured for an interface. The Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) appears in parentheses to the right of the IP status.

The Tunnel field indicates the capacity of traffic engineering on the interface.

The Operational field shows the status of the LDP. The interfaceSerial0/1.2 is down in the example; therefore, the Operational field shows that LDP is not operational on that interface.

Configuration Example: MPLS LSC

The network topology shown in Figure 3 incorporates two ATM-LSRs in an MPLS network. This topology includes two LSCs (Cisco 7200 routers), two BPX switches, and two Edge LSRs (Cisco 7200 routers).

Figure 3 ATM-LSR Network Configuration Example

Configuration for LSC1

7200 LSC1:

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

BPX1 and BPX2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3
cnfrsrc 1.3 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for LSC2

7200 LSC2:

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.18.143.22 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi 
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR1

LSR1:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.132.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.5 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR2

7200 LSR2:

ip cef 
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.172.18 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.9 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch and RPM-PR as an MPLS LSC

You can configure the Cisco MGX 8850 switch with the Cisco 8850 Router Processor Module (RPM-PR) as an MPLS LSC in an MPLS network.

The RPM-PR provides integrated IP in an ATM platform, enabling services such as integrated Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP), Frame Relay termination, and IP virtual private networks (VPNs) using MPLS technology. It provides Cisco IOS-based multiprotocol routing over ATM, Frame Relay and ATM Interface Layer 3 Termination, Local Server Interconnect over High-Speed LANs, access concentration, and switching between Ethernet LANs and the WAN facilities of the MGX 8850. The RPM-PR runs Cisco IOS software.

The hardware that supports MPLS LSC functionality on the Cisco MGX 8850 switch is described in the following sections.

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR Overview

The RPM-PR is a router module based on an NPE-400 processor, modified to fit into any full-height module slot on a Cisco MGX 8850 32-slot chassis. It connects to the PXM-45 back card, the 4E/B back card, and other service modules through the midplane. The RPM-PR receives power from the midplane and communicates over the midplane with the PXM-45 using IPC over ATM.

The RPM-PR has an integrated ATM interface—a permanently attached ATM port adapter/back card based on the Cisco ATM Deluxe module—and the RPM-PR can support up to two optional back cards to provide LAN connectivity.

The MGX 8850 shelf can be completely populated with 12 RPM-PRs. This allows you to use multiple RPM-PRs to achieve load sharing. Load sharing is achieved by manually distributing connections across multiple embedded RPM-PR router blades.


Note In a 32-slot MGX 8850 configuration, slots 7 and 8 are reserved for the PXM-45 cards occupying the full height of the chassis. Slots 15, 16, 31, and 32 are reserved for Service Redundancy Modules (SRMs).

In a 16-slot configuration, you can add RPM-PRs in any of slots 1 through 6 and 9 through 14. RPM-PRs must not be added to slots 7, 8, 15, or 16 in the MGX 8850 switch.


The RPM-PR fits into the Cisco MGX 8850 and MGX 8850 midplane architecture so that the front card provides Cisco IOS router services, and the back cards provide physical network connectivity. The RPM-PR front card also provides ATM connectivity to the Cisco MGX 8850 cellbus at full-duplex OC-3.

Figure 4 shows a Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR connected to the Cisco MGX 8850 midplane and the back cards.

Figure 4 PRM-PR Connected to the MGX 8850 Midplane and to Back Cards

The RPM-PR back cards are connected to the front card by a dual PCI bus (see Figure 4). Each RPM-PR card can be equipped with up to two single-height back cards.


Note Slots 7 and 8 are reserved for the PXM-45/B cards occupying the full height of the chassis. You can use PXM-45-UI-S3 cards in the top slots and T3 cards in the bottom slots. You can use MGX-RJ45-FE cards in the top slots and MGX-RJ45-4E/B cards in the bottom slots.



Note The RPM-PR card within the MGX 8850 chassis supports online insertion and removal of the MGX-RJ45-4E/B and the FE back cards. However, the ATM port adapter is inside the RPM-PR.


MGX 8850 Cellbus

The MGX 8850 cellbus in the MGX 8850 midplane communicates between the RPM-PR, service modules (cellbus slaves) and the PXM-45 (cellbus master) (see Figure 4). Each cellbus is connected to a set of PXM-45 cards. Only one cellbus can be active at a time.

Communication from master to slaves consists of a broadcast to all slaves. The first byte of the cell header contains addressing information. Each slave will monitor data traffic and "pick up" cells that are destined to its slot. Also, a multicast bit allows all slaves to receive a cell simultaneously.

Communication from the slaves to the master is more complicated. Because many slaves might attempt to transmit simultaneously, arbitration among slaves is required. At the start of a given cell period, the master will poll all slaves to see if they have anything to send. By the end of the current cell, the master will grant, or allow, one of the slaves to transmit. Polling and data transmission occur simultaneously.

If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45.

Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate:

PXM> dspcbclk

CellBus    Rate (MHz)    Slots     Allowable Rates (MHz)
     ----------------------------------------------------------
        CB1         21        1, 2            21, 42
        CB2         21        3, 4            21, 42
        CB3         21        5, 6            21, 42
        CB4         21        17 - 22         21
        CB5         21        9, 10           21, 42
        CB6         21        11, 12          21, 42
        CB7         21        13, 14          21, 42
        CB8         21        25 - 30         21

Use the cnfcbclk cbn 42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus:

PXM> cnfcbclk cb1 42

CellBus    Rate (MHz)    Slots     Allowable Rates (MHz)
     ----------------------------------------------------------
        CB1         42        1, 2            21, 42
        CB2         21        3, 4            21, 42
        CB3         21        5, 6            21, 42
        CB4         21        17 - 22         21
        CB5         21        9, 10           21, 42
        CB6         21        11, 12          21, 42
        CB7         21        13, 14          21, 42
        CB8         21        25 - 30         21

ATM Deluxe Integrated Port Adapter

The ATM deluxe port adapter provides a single ATM interface to the MGX 8850 cellbus interface (CBI). The ATM port adapter is a permanent, internal ATM interface. As such, it has no cabling to install and does not support interface types. It connects internally and directly to the MGX 8850 midplane.

Comparing Cisco 7200 LSC Configuration with Cisco RPM-PR LSC Configuration

This section compares the configuration of the Cisco 7200 LSC controlling Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switches with the configuration of the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC controlling the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

Table 2 compares the configuration of switch partitions and partition resources for the Cisco 7200 LSC controlling the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the configuration of the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC controlling the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

Table 2 Configuring Partitions and Partition Resources  

Platform
Configuration

Cisco 7200 routers as LSC for Cisco BPX and Cisco IGX switches

Configure VSI MPLS partitioning and resources at the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch, respectively. No switch partition or switch resource is configured at the Cisco 7200 LSC.

The following example adds the LSC controller in slot 1 port 1 of the Cisco BPX switch:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000

The following example configures slot 2 port 2 of the Cisco BXM for XtagInt in the LSC:

uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR as LSC in Cisco MGX 8850 switch

In contrast, configure the following at the RPM-PR (router):

Partitions—MPLS and Private Network-Network Interface (PNNI)

Partition resources—Interface bandwidth and interface resources, virtual path identifier (VPI), and virtual channel identifier (VCI)

The following commands configure the LSC controller ID (8), the switch partition ID (2), and the partition resources in the PRM-PR:

interface Switch1
tag-control-protocol vsi id 8 
ip route-cache cef
switch partition vcc 2 8 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808

Add the LSC controller in the PXM-45 card using the addcontroller <cntrlrtid> <i | o> <cntrlrType> <slot> <cntrlrName> command, for example:

SWITCH.7.PXM45.a>addcontroller 8 i 3 5 LSC1 



Note In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, you configure the partition resources of the switch ports in the RPM-PR. In the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch, you configure all the resources in the switch.


Table 3 compares the configuration of interfaces and virtual paths and identifiers of the Cisco 7200 LSC controlling the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the configuration of the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC controlling the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

Table 3 Configuring Interfaces and Virtual Path Identifiers/Ranges

Platform
Configuration

Cisco 7200 routers as LSC for Cisco BPX and Cisco IGX switches

Configure the Xtag interfaces the same as you would for an Edge LSR. No difference exists in the LSC configuration for the User-Network Interface (UNI), the Network-to-Network Interface (NNI), or the virtual template (VT) interfaces.

Use any VPI or VPI range or virtual path (VP) tunnel.

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR as LSC in Cisco MGX 8850 switch

With the Cisco 8850 RPM-PR connected directly to the PXM-45 (in the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch), use VPI = 0 for MPLS with virtual channel connection (VCC) partitioning. For this connection, use VPI = 0, VCI = 32 to 3808 for all Xtag interfaces. In the LSC, you cannot use any other VPI or VP tunnel between directly connected RPM-PRs and PXM-45s.

With Cisco MGX 8850 AXSM ports used with the Xtag interfaces, configure all UNI, NNI and Virtual Network-Network Interface (VNNI) connections in the same way that you configure them for Cisco BPX and IGX switches. You can configure any VPI, VPI range, and VP tunnel. In addition, you can configure virtual path connections (VPCs), or virtual channel connections (VCCs), or both.

Use a descriptor (instead of the bpx or igx in a Cisco BPX or IGX command) when you configure an extended port command for an Xtag interface for the Cisco MGX 8850 switch. Use the following command if the PXM and RPM-PR are in the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch:

Router(config)# extended-port Switch1 descriptor "9.1" 

Use this command if the Xtag interface is controlling the AXSM card in a different Cisco MGX 8850 switch:

Router(config)# extended-port Switch1 descriptor "1:1.1:1"

In both cases, you may need to enter the show controller vsi descriptor command to get the correct port number.


Comparing Edge Label Switch Router Configurations

This section compares the configuration of the Cisco 7200 routers, and the Cisco 12000 Internet routers as an Edge Label Switch Router (Edge LSR) with the configuration of the Cisco MGX8850 RPM-PR as an Edge LSR.

Table 4 compares the Edge LSR configuration of the Cisco 7200 routers, and the Cisco 12000 Internet routers with the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR when connected to another RPM-PR and when connected to other routers, such as the Cisco 7200 router.

Table 4 Edge Label Switch Router Configuration Comparisons

Platform
Configuration

Cisco 7200, and Cisco 12000 routers

Provision the permanent virtual circuits (PVCs) and permanent virtual paths (PVPs) manually. Once you create a PVC or PVP you can run MPLS on the PVC or PVP. With MPLS, you can configure the following:

On the PVCs—Packet MPLS Downstream Unsolicited Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP) or Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)

On the PVPs—Label-controlled ATM (LC-ATM) interface Downstream on Demand TDP or LDP

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR

Create signaled connections, soft permanent virtual circuit (SPVC) and soft permanent virtual path (SPVP) connections, using PNNI between Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PRs. For this type of connection with VPC partitions, use any VPI = 1 to 256. You can run MPLS on SPVCs or SPVPs. With MPLS, you can configure the following:

On the SPVCs—Packet MPLS Downstream Unsolicited TDP or LDP

On the SPVPs—LC-ATM Downstream on Demand TDP or LDP

Connecting Cisco MGX RPM-PR Edge LSR to other routers

Connect the Cisco RPM-PR Edge LSR with other routers (such as the Cisco 7200 router, the Cisco 12000 router, or the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the Cisco 7200 router) through AXSM or AXSM-E cards. These routers cannot use PNNI signaling. Therefore, you need to do the following:

Start the SPVCs and SPVPs from the RPM-PR and terminate them in the AXSM or AXSM-E cards. (PNNI signaling makes the connection between the RPM-PR and the AXSM or AXSM-E cards.)

Provision the PVC and PVP connections manually at the Cisco 7200, and Cisco 12000 routers, and the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the Cisco 7200 router.


Configuring the Cisco MGX RPM-PR

This section provides the following configuration information for the Cisco MGX RPM-PR:

Accessing the RPM-PR Command Line Interface

Booting the RPM-PR

RPM-PR Bootflash Precautions

Configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch with RPM-PR to Perform Basic LSC Operations

Accessing the RPM-PR Command Line Interface

To configure the RPM-PR, you must access the command line interface (CLI) of the RPM-PR.

You can access the RPM-PR CLI using any of the following methods:

Console port on the front of the RPM-PR.

cc from another MGX 8850 card.

Telnet from a workstation, PC, or another router.

Booting the RPM-PR

When the RPM-PR is booted, the boot image must be the first file in the bootflash. (See the section "RPM-PR Bootflash Precautions" to make sure that the first file on the bootflash is a valid boot image.) If the bootflash does not have a valid boot image as a first file, the card may not be able to boot and can result in bootflash corruption. If the bootflash is corrupted, you need to send the card back for an external burn with a valid boot image.

You can reboot the RPM-PR from the PXM by entering the resetcd <card_number> command from the switch CLI, where card_number is the slot number of the RPM-PR that is being rebooted.


Caution Omitting the card number resets the entire system.

Also, you can reboot the RPM-PR from the RPM-PR using the RPM-PR console port and entering the reload command.


Note The boot system bootflash:<filename> command loads the run-time software from the bootflash. The boot system E:< filename> command loads the run-time software from the PXM-45 hard disk. You can use either command to load the run-time software.


In addition, you can use the regular TFTP boot procedures to boot the RPM-PR. Make sure you have the network connection to the tftpboot server first.

RPM-PR Bootflash Precautions

The RPM-PR bootflash is used to store boot image, and possibly configuration and run-time files. The bootflash stores and accesses data sequentially, and the RPM-PR boot image must be the first file stored to successfully boot the card.

The RPM's boot image, which comes loaded on the bootflash, will work for all RPM IOS images, and therefore, no reason exists to delete or move the factory-installed boot image.


Caution Erasing or moving the boot image can cause RPM-PRs to fail to boot. When this happens, the RPM must be returned to Cisco and reflashed.

To avoid unnecessary failures, requiring card servicing, you should:

Never erase the boot file from the RPM bootflash.

Never change the position of the boot file on the RPM bootflash.

Use care when "squeezing" the bootflash to clean it up.

As long as the boot file remains intact in the first position on the bootflash, the RPM will successfully boot.


Note The boot system bootflash:<filename> command loads the run-time software from the bootflash. The boot system E:< filename> command loads the run-time software from the PXM-45 hard disk. You can use either command to load the run-time software.


Configuring the Cisco MGX 8850 Switch with RPM-PR to Perform Basic LSC Operations

To support MPLS on the Cisco 8850 switch, you need to configure MPLS support on the RPM-PR, the PXM-45, and the AXSM cards.

Figure 5 shows a Cisco MGX 8850 switch with a Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR set up to perform basic MPLS LSC functions. The following sections contain configuration steps and examples that show the setup of MPLS support on the Cisco MGX 8850 switch with a Cisco MGX RPM-PR.

Figure 5 Typical Cisco MGX 8850 Configuration to Support MPLS LSC Functions


Note If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45. Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate. Use the cnfcbclk cb42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus.


Configuration Steps: Adding an MPLS Controller to the PXM-45

To add an MPLS controller to the PXM-45 card, follow these steps:

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

MGX8850.7.PXM.a> addcontroller 8 i 3 5 
LSC1

Identifies a network control protocol to the VSI that runs on the node.

This control protocol is identified by an ID of 8 (possible, 3 to 20), as an internal (i) MPLS controller (3), located in slot 5. The name of the controller is LSC1.

Step 2 

MGX8850.7.PXM.a> cc 5
Router> enable
Password:
Router# config terminal

Switches to the router (RPM-PR card).

Accesses the configuration mode of the router.

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with Ctrl/Z.

Step 3 

Router(config)# ip cef

Enables Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF).

Step 4 

Router(config)# interface loopback0
Router(config-if)# ip address 28.28.28.28 
255.255.255.255

Creates a software-only loopback interface that emulates an interface that is always up. Specify an interface number for the loopback interface. There is no limit on the number of loopback interfaces you can create.

Assigns an IP address to Loopback0. It is important that all loopback addresses in an MPLS network are host addresses, that is, with a mask of 255.255.255.255.

Step 5 

Router(config-if)# interface switch1
Router(config-if)# no ip address
Router(config-if)# tag-control-protocol 
vsi id 8
Router(config-if)# ip route-cache cef

Creates an ATM interface (switch1) without an IP address.

Configures a VSI on switch1. The VSI ID is 8. The VSI ID must match the controller ID you assign to the ATM switch.

Enables CEF on that interface.

Step 6 

Router(config-if)# switch partition vcc 2 
8

Configures the resource partition for the controller with a partition ID of 2. The controller ID (8) is the ID set with the addcontroller command.

Step 7 

Router(config-if-swpart)# 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
Router(config-if-swpart)# 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100

Sets the ingress bandwidth percentage and the egress bandwidth percentage 1 to 100 percent for the controller.

Step 8 

Router(config-if-swpart)# vpi 0 0 
Router(config-if-swpart)# vci 32 3808

Sets the VPI/VCI ranges for the controller.

Step 9 

Router(config-if-swpart)# Ctrl/Z

Exits configuration mode.

When you use the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR as an MPLS LSC, you also need to add and partition an AXSM NNI port for MPLS.

Configuration Example: Adding and Partitioning an AXSM NNI Port for MPLS

The following example shows adding and then partitioning an NNI port on an AXSM card for MPLS.

cc 1
cnfcdsct 4
upln 1.1
addport 1 1.1 353207 353207 4 2
addpart 1 2 8 500000 500000 500000 500000 0 15 32 65535 4000 4000 
dspparts

Where:

Options for the cnfcdsct are 4 = policing on and 5 = policing off for ATM Forum (ATMF) service types.

The addport command syntax is as follows:

addport ifNum bay.line guaranteedRate maxRate sctID ifType [vpiNum]

where:

ifNum = a number between 1 and 60  
bay.line = the Line number 
guaranteedRate = the virtual rate in cells/sec 
MaxRate = OC48 rate—between 50 and 5651320 
(maxRate for OC12 is between 50 and 1412830 
maxRate for OC3 is between 50 and 353207 
maxRate for T3 is between 50 and 96000 (PLCP), 104268 (ADM) 
maxRate for E3 is between 50 and 80000) 
sctID = the Port SCT ID between 0 and 255, for default file use 0 
ifType = 1 for uni; 2 for nni; 3 for vnni 
(optional) vpiNum = between a number 1 and 4095, used for configuring the 
interface as a virtual trunk

The guaranteedRate argument must equal the maxRate argument.

The addpart syntax is as follows:

addpart ifNum partID cntlrID egrminbw egrmaxbw ingrminbw ingrmaxbw minVpi maxVpi minVci maxVci minConns maxConns

Where:

ifNum = a number between 1 and 60 
partId = the Partition Identifier between 1 and 20 
cntrlrID = the Controller Identifier between 1 and 20 
egrminbw = the Egress guaranteed percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
egrmaxbw = the Egress maximum percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
ingrminbw = the Ingress guaranteed percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
ingrmaxbw = the Ingress maximum percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth  
minVpi = the minimum VPI value, which is a number between 0 and 4095 (0 to 255 for 
UNI interface)  
maxVpi = the maximum VPI value, which is number between 0 and 4095 (0 to 255 for 
UNI interface) 
minVci = the minimum VCI value, which is a number between 32 and 65535 
maxVci = the maximum VCI value, which is a number between 32 and 65535  
minConns = the guaranteed number of connections, which is a number between 0 and 
the maximum number of connections in portgroup  
maxConns = the maximum number of connections, which is a number between 0 and the 
maximum number of connections in portgroup

The dspparts command shows the newly added partition and verifies its settings.

Configuration Steps: Mapping an AXSM Port to an XtagATM Interface on the LSC

Enter the following commands into the RPM-PR to map AXSM ports to the LSC:

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

MGX8850.7.PXM.a> cc 5

Switches to the router (RPM-PR card in slot 5).

Step 2 

Router> enable
Password:

Accesses the router commands.

Step 3 

Router# config terminal
Router(config)#

Enters the global configuration mode.

Step 4 

Router(config)# interface XtagATM1111

Creates an XtagATM interface (XtagATM1111).

Step 5 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
Loopback0

Makes XtagATM1111 an unnumbered interface and uses the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute. The interfaces in an ATM MPLS network should usually be unnumbered. This reduces the number of IP destination-prefixes in the routing table, which reduces the number of labels and LVCs used in the network.

Step 6 

Router(config-if)# extended-port Switch1 
descriptor "1:1.1:1"

Associates the XtagATM interface with an external interface (AXSM port 1.1) on the remotely controlled ATM switch.

Switch1 identifies the ATM interface used to control the remote ATM switch.

The descriptor format is x:y.y:z.

x = slot where the AXSM is located (1)

y.y = line number (1.1)

z = port number (1) (this is a logical port)

Step 7 

Router(config-if)# mpls ip

Enables label switching on AXSM port 1.1.

Step 8 

Router(config-if)# Ctrl/Z

Exits configuration mode.

When you use the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR as an MPLS LSC, you also need to create the VNNI port on the AXSM card and add an XtagATM interface on the LSC for the VNNI port.

Configuration Example: Creating the VNNI Port on the AXSM Card

The following example shows the creation of a VNNI port on the AXSM card residing on the PXM-45 shelf.

cc 1
cnfcdsct 4
upln 1.2
addport 12 1.2 353207 353207 4 2 11
addpart 12 2 8 250000 250000 250000 250000 11 11 32 65535 10000 10000
dsppart 2

Where:

The addport command syntax is as follows:

addport ifNum bay.line guaranteedRate maxRate sctID ifType [vpiNum]

Where:

ifNum = a number between 1 and 60  
bay.line = the Line number 
guaranteedRate = the virtual rate in cells/sec 
MaxRate = OC48 rate—between 50 and 5651320 
(maxRate for OC12 is between 50 and 1412830 
maxRate for OC3 is between 50 and 353207 
maxRate for T3 is between 50 and 96000 (PLCP), 104268 (ADM) 
maxRate for E3 is between 50 and 80000) 
sctID = the Port SCT ID between 0 and 255, for default file use 0 
ifType = 1 for uni; 2 for nni; 3 for vnni 
(optional) vpiNum = VPI between 1 and 4095, used for configuring the interface as 
a virtual trunk

The guaranteedRate argument must equal the maxRate argument.

The addpart syntax is as follows:

addpart ifNum partID cntlrID egrminbw egrmaxbw ingrminbw ingrmaxbw minVpi maxVpi minVci maxVci minConns maxConns

Where:

ifNum = a number between 1 and 60 
partId = the Partition Identifier between 1 and 20 
cntrlrID = the Controller Identifier between 1 and 20 
egrminbw = the Egress guaranteed percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
egrmaxbw = the Egress maximum percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
ingrminbw = the Ingress guaranteed percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
ingrmaxbw = the Ingress maximum percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth  
minVpi = the minimum VPI value, which is a number between 0 and 4095 (0 to 255 for 
UNI interface)  
maxVpi = the maximum VPI value, which is number between 0 and 4095 (0 to 255 for 
UNI interface) 
minVci = the minimum VCI value, which is a number between 32 and 65535 
maxVci = the maximum VCI value, which is a number between 32 and 65535  
minConns = the guaranteed number of connections, which is a number between 0 and 
the maximum number of connections in portgroup  
maxConns = the maximum number of connections, which is a number between 0 and the 
maximum number of connections in portgroup

The dsppart command shows the newly added partition (2) and verifies its settings.

Configuration Example: Adding an XtagATM Interface on the LSC for the VNNI Port

The following example shows the addition of an XtagATM interface on the Label Switch Controller (LSC) for the VNNI port.

cc 5
enable
Password: 
config terminal
Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.
!
interface XtagATM11212
ip unnumbered Loopback0
extended-port Switch1 descriptor "1:1.2:12"
mpls ip 

Configuration Steps: Configuring an RPM as an Edge Label Switch Router

To configure the RPM-PR as an Edge Label Switch Router (Edge LSR) on the MGX 8850 Release 2 shelf, follow these steps:

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

MGX8850.7.PXM.a> cc 3
Router> enable
Password:
Router# config terminal

Connects to the router (RPM-PR card).

Accesses router commands.

Enters the global configuration mode of the router.

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with Ctrl/Z.

Step 2 

Router(config)# ip cef

Enables Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF).

Step 3 

Router(config)# interface Loopback0
Router(config-if)# ip address 
192.168.2.11 255.255.255.255

Creates a software-only loopback interface that emulates an interface that is always up. Specifies an interface number for the loopback interface. There is no limit on the number of loopback interfaces you can create.

Assigns an IP address to Loopback0. It is important that all loopback addresses in an MPLS network are host addresses, that is, with a mask of 255.255.255.255.

Step 4 

Router(config-if)# switch partition vcc 2 
8

Configures the resource partition for the controller with a partition ID of 2. The controller ID (8) is the ID set with the addcontroller command.

Step 5 

Router(config-if-swpart)# 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
Router(config-if-swpart)# 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100

Sets the ingress bandwidth percentage and the egress bandwidth percentage 1 to 100 percent for the controller. This command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

Step 6 

Router(config-if-swpart)# vpi 0 0 
Router(config-if-swpart)# vci 32 3808

Sets the VPI/VCI ranges for the controller.

Step 7 

Router(config-if-swpart)# Ctrl/Z

Exits partition configuration mode.

Step 8 

Router(config)# interface Switch1.11 mpls

Creates a subinterface on the RPM-PR and identifies the type of link.

The switch interface number is always 1. The subinterface number (11) must be unique for the RPM-PR. You choose the subinterface number when you create the subinterface.

Step 9 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
Loopback0

Makes the subinterface an unnumbered interface and uses the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute.

Step 10 

Router(config-if)# mpls ip 

Enables MPLS forwarding of IPv4 packets.

Step 11 

Router(config-if)# Ctrl/Z

Exits configuration mode.

Configuring an XTag Interface in the LSC Connecting to the RPM-PR Edge LSR

To configure an XTag interface on the LSC connecting to the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR Edge LSR, follow these steps:

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

MGX8850.7.PXM.a> cc 3
Router> enable
Password:
Router# config terminal

Connects to the router (RPM-PR card).

Accesses router commands.

Enters the global configuration mode of the router.

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with Ctrl/Z.

Step 2 

Router(config)# ip cef

Enables Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF).

Step 3 

Router(config)# interface loopback0

Router(config-if)# ip address 10.9.9.9 
255.255.255.255

Creates a software-only loopback interface that emulates an interface that is always up. Specifies an interface number for the loopback interface. There is no limit on the number of loopback interfaces you can create.

Assigns an IP address to Loopback0. It is important that all loopback addresses in an MPLS network are host addresses, that is, with a mask of 255.255.255.255.

Step 4 

Router(config)# interface switch1

Configures an ATM interface (Switch1).

Step 5 

Router(config-if)# switch partition  
vcc 2 8

Configures the resource partition for the controller with a partition ID of 2. The controller ID (8) is the ID set with the addcontroller command.

Step 6 

Router(config-if-swpart)# 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
Router(config-if-swpart)# 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100

Sets the ingress bandwidth percentage and the egress bandwidth percentage 1 to 100 percent for the controller. This command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

Step 7 

Router(config-if-swpart)# vpi 0 0 
Router(config-if-swpart)# vci 32 3808

Sets the VPI/VCI ranges for the controller.

Step 8 

Router(config-if-swpart)# Ctrl/Z

Exits partition configuration mode.

Step 9 

Router(config)# interface XTagATM31

Creates an XTag ATM interface (XTagATM31).

Step 10 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
Loopback0

Makes the subinterface an unnumbered interface and uses the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute.

Step 11 

Router(config-if)# extended-port switch1 
descriptor "3.1"

Associates the XtagATM interface with port 3.1.

Step 12 

Router(config-if)# mpls ip 

Enables MPLS forwarding of IPv4 packets.

Step 13 

Router(config-if)# Ctrl/Z

Exits configuration mode.

MGX ATM MPLS Configuration Examples

This section contains the following sample Cisco MGX 8850 ATM MPLS configurations:

Simple Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC Network Configuration (VCC Switch Partition)

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC Network Configuration with Cisco MGX 8850 and Cisco BPX Switches (VCC Switch Partition)

Simple Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC Network Configuration (VCC Switch Partition)

Figure 6 represents the sample RPM-PR LSC network configuration for a VCC switch partition for the configuration examples that follow.

RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration

PXM LSC Configuration

RPM-PR LSC Configuration

RPM-PR Edge LSR2 Configuration

Figure 6 Sample RPM-PR LSC Network Configuration


Note If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45. Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate. Use the cnfcbclk cb42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus.


RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration

Following is an example of an RPM-PR Edge LSR(1) configuration. This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, only VCI ranges can be used; you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. In this example, only one label (tag) switching interface is used, so you can use the default VPI = 0 and the VCI range = 32 to 3808.


Note In the Cisco BPX and IGX switches, you normally use VPI range or VP tunnels or both. In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, a VCI range is commonly used. In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, the partition resources of the switch ports are configured at the RPM-PR. In the Cisco BPX or IGX switches, all resources are configured in the switch.


ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.9.9.9 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
switch partition vcc 2 8 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100      
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808
!
interface Switch1.1 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0 
mpls atm vpi 0 vci 33 3000
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The switch partition vcc 2 8 command configures a partition ID  = 2 and a controller ID  = 8.

The ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

PXM LSC Configuration

The following command adds the LSC controller in the PXM-45. Use the addcontroller <cntrlrtid> <o> <cntrlrType> <slot> [cntrlrName] command:

addcontroller 8 i 3 10 LSC 

Where:

The controller ID = 8.

The controller is internal (i).

The controller type =MPLS (3).

The slot number = 10.

The name of the controller = LSC.

RPM-PR LSC Configuration

Following is an example of an RPM-PR LSC configuration. This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, you can use only VPI = 0 and VCI ranges; you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels.

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.20.20.20 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
tag-control-protocol vsi id 8 
ip route-cache cef
switch partition vcc 2 8 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808
!
interface XTagATM91
ip unnumbered Loopback0
extended-port Switch1 descriptor 9.1 
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM111
ip unnumbered Loopback0
extended-port Switch1 descriptor 11.1 
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The tag-control-protocol vsi id 8 command configures an LSC controller with an ID = 8.

The switch partition vcc 2 8 command configures the VCC partition with an MPLS partition ID = 2. (The LSC controller ID is 8.)

The ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 partition resource command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

You need to enter a show controller vsi descriptor command to get the port number, for example, 9.1, for the extended-port Switch1 descriptor 9.1 command. If this Xtag interface is controlling the AXSM card, then the format is different. Again, refer to the output from the show controller vsi descriptor command.

RPM-PR Edge LSR2 Configuration

Following is an example of an RPM-PR Edge LSR(2) configuration. This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, only VPI = 0 and any VCI in the allowed range can be used; you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels.

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
switch partition vcc 2 8 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808
!
interface Switch1.1 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0
mpls atm vpi 0 vci 33 3000
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0 

Where:

The switch partition vcc 2 8 command configures the VCC partition with an MPLS partition ID = 2 and a LSC controller ID = 8.

The ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 partition resource command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC Network Configuration with Cisco MGX 8850 and Cisco BPX Switches (VCC Switch Partition)

Figure 7 represents a sample RPM-PR LSC network configuration with the MGX 8850 and the BPX switches for the configuration examples that follow.

RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration

PXM LSC Configuration

RPM-PR LSC Configuration

Mapping a Cisco MGX 8850 AXSM Port to an XtagATM Interface on the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC

AXSM Configuration for the Xtag Interfaces

Configuration for BXP

Configuration for Cisco 7200 LSC

Configuration for Cisco 7200 Edge LSR2

Figure 7 Sample RPM-PR LSC Network with Cisco MGX 8850 and Cisco BPX Switches


Note If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45. Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate. Use the cnfcbclk cb42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus.


RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration

Following is an example of a PRM-PR Edge LSR(1) configuration. This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, you can use only VCI ranges; you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. In this example, only one label (tag) switching interface is used, so you use the default VPI = 0 and the VCI range =  33 to 3808.


Note In the Cisco BPX and IGX switches, you normally use a VPI range or VP tunnels or both. In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, a VCI range is commonly used.

In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, the partition resources of the switch ports are configured at the RPM-PR. In the Cisco BPX or IGX switches, all resources are configured in the switch.


ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.9.9.9 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
switch partition vcc 2 8      
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808
!
interface Switch1.1 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0 
mpls atm vpi 0 vci 33 3000
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The switch partition vcc 2 8 command configures a partition ID  = 2 and a controller ID  = 8.

The ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 partition resource command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

PXM LSC Configuration

The following command adds the LSC controller in the PXM-45. Use the addcontroller <cntrlrtid> <0> <cntrlrType> <slot> [cntrlrName] command:

addcontroller 8 i 3 10 LSC 

Where:

The controller has an ID = 8.

The controller is internal (i).

The controller type = MPLS (3).

The slot number = 10.

The name of the controller = LSC.

RPM-PR LSC Configuration

Following is an example of an RPM-PR LSC configuration. This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, you can use only VPI = 0 and VCI ranges: you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels.

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend vc
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.20.20.20 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
tag-control-protocol vsi id 8 
ip route-cache cef
switch partition vcc 2 8 
controller ID is 8.
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808
!
interface XTagATM91
ip unnumbered Loopback0
extended-port Switch1 descriptor 9.1 
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The tag-control-protocol vsi id 8 command configures an LSC controller with an ID = 8.

The switch partition vcc 2 8 command configures the VCC partition with an MPLS partition ID = 2. (The LSC controller ID is 8.)

The ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 partition resource command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

You need to enter a show controller vsi descriptor command to get the port number, for example, 9.1, for the extended-port Switch1 descriptor 9.1 command. If this Xtag interface is controlling the AXSM card, then the format is different. Again, refer to the output from the show controller vsi descriptor command.

Mapping a Cisco MGX 8850 AXSM Port to an XtagATM Interface on the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR LSC

The following example shows a sample configuration for mapping an AXSM port to an XtagATM interface on the RPM-PR LSC:

interface XTagATM1111
ip unnumbered Loopback0
extended-port Switch1 descriptor 1:1.1:1
mpls atm vpi 0-15 
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

In the extended-port Switch1 descriptor 1:1.1:1 command, the descriptor format is x:y.y:z, where

= slot for the AXSM card

y.y =  the line number

= the port number (this is a logical port)

The mpls atm vpi 0-15 command configures a VPI range of 0 to 15 in the AXSM interface.

AXSM Configuration for the Xtag Interfaces

This configuration example shows adding and partitioning an NNI port on an AXSM card for MPLS. Enter the cc command to change to an AXSM card, then enter the cnfcdsct command to configure the AXSM card service class template (SCT) for PNNI and MPLS:

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7PXM.a> prompt:

cc 1 

At the AXM SWITCH.1.AXSM.a> prompt:

cnfcdsct 4 
upln 1.1 
addport 1 1.1 353207 353207 4 2
addpart 1 2 5 500000 500000 500000 500000 0 15 32 65535 4000 4000 
dspparts

if part Ctlr egr egr ingr ingr min max min max min max
Num ID ID GuarBw  MaxBw   GuarBw  MaxBw vpi vpi vci vci conn conn
         (.0001%)(.0001%)(.0001%)(.0001%)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 2 5 500000 500000 500000 500000 0 15 32 65535 4000 4000

Where:

For the cnfcdsct 4 command, 4 = policing on; 5 = policing off (for ATMF service types).

The upln 1.1 command brings up the line where you want to add the port.

The addport command adds the port. The syntax for the command is as follows:

addport ifNum bay.line guaranteedRate maxRate sctID ifType [vpiNum]

Where:

ifNum is a number between 1 and 60  
bay.line is the format for the Line Number  
guaranteedRate is the virtual rates in cells/sec 
maxRate for OC48 = between 50 and 5651320 
for OC12 = between 50 and 1412830 
for OC3 = between 50 and 353207 
for T3 = between 50 and 96000(PLCP),104268(ADM) 
for E3 = between 50 and 80000  
sctID is the Port SCT ID between 0 and 255, for the default file use 0  
ifType is 1 for UNI; 2 for NNI; 3 for VNNI  
vpiNum is between 1 and 4095, used for configuring the interface as virtual trunk

The guaranteedRate argument must equal the maxRate argument.

The addpart command partitions the port you just added. The syntax for the command is as follows:

addpart ifNum partID cntlrID egrminbw egrmaxbw ingrminbw ingrmaxbw minVpi maxVpi minVci maxVci minConns maxConns

Where:

ifNum is a number between 1 and 60 
partID is the partition identifier between 1 and 20 
cntrlrID is the controller identifier between 1 and 20 
egrminbw is the Egress guaranteed percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface 
bandwidth 
egrmaxbw is the Egress maximum percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
ingrminbw is the Ingress guaranteed percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of  
interface bandwidth 
ingrmaxbw is the Ingress maximum percentage of bandwidth in units of 0.0001% of 
interface bandwidth 
minVpi is the minimum VPI value, which is a number between 0 and 4095 (0 to 255 
for the UNI interface) 
maxVpi is the maximum VPI value, which is number between 0 and 4095 (0 to 255 for 
the UNI interface) 
minVci is the minimum VCI value, which is a number between 32 and 65535 
maxVci is the maximum VCI value, which is a number between 32 and 65535 
minConns is the guaranteed number of connections, which is a number between 0 
and the maximum number of connections in portgroup (see dspcd for portgroup info) 
maxConns is the maximum number of connections, which is a number between 0 and the 
maximum number of connections in portgroup (see dspcd for portgroup info)

The dspparts command displays the newly added partition and verifies its settings.

Configuration for BXP

BPX:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3
cnfrsrc 1.3 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Configuration for Cisco 7200 LSC

7200 LSC:

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 40.40.40.40 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi 
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 40.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Configuration for Cisco 7200 Edge LSR2

7200 LSR2:

ip cef 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 30.30.30.30 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.5 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 30.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

PVP-Based ATM MPLS Network Configuration

This section contains sample configurations for the following PVP-based ATM MPLS network configurations:

Edge LSR to Edge LSR SPVP LC-ATM Interface Configuration

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR Connected to an External Device

Edge LSR to Edge LSR SPVP LC-ATM Interface Configuration

Figure 8 represents a sample permanent virtual path (PVP) configuration with devices in the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch for the ATM MPLS network configuration examples that follow.

RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

PXM-45 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

RPM -PR Edge LSR2 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

Figure 8 PVP Configuration with Devices in Same Cisco MGX 8850 Switch


Note If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45. Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate. Use the cnfcbclk cb42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus.


RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

This example uses the switch partition vpc command and therefore, you can use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. If you create a VP tunnel between two routers, you need to configure VPC partitioning and PNNI signaling to bring up the PVP. Then you can run the LC-ATM interface on the PVP.


Note In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, the partition resources of the switch ports are configured at the RPM-PR. In the Cisco BPX switch, you configure all resources in the switch.


Following is a sample configuration for the RPM-PR Edge LSR1:

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.9.9.9 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
atm pvp 2 10000
switch partition vpc 1 2 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 1 255
vci 0 65535
!
interface Switch1.2 mpls 
ip unnumbered Loopback0
pvc 2/0 
mpls atm control-vc 2 32
mpls atm vpi 2 vci 33-65518
mpls ip
switch connection vpc 2 master remote 
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The switch partition vpc 1 2 command configures the VPC switch partition. For PNNI, the partition ID  = 1 and the controller ID = 2.

The ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 partition resource command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

In the interface Switch1.2 mpls command, the interface is Switch1.2.

The pvc 2/0 command configures a PVC = 2/0 on the VP.

The switch connection vpc 2 master remote command enables PNNI to create a PVP (VPI = 2) connection. This command also indicates that the remote peer is the master, therefore, this is slave side.


Note You need to configure the slave side first. Then, you are able to get the ATM NSAP address from the PXM. This is needed at the master side.


PXM-45 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

This illustrates the PXM configuration for VPC switch partitioning for a PVP when all devices exist on the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

addcontroller 2 i 2 7 PNNI
dnpnport 9.2
cnfpnportsig 9.2 -univer none
uppnport 9.2
dspcon 9.2 2 

Port               Vpi Vci       Owner     State 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local 9:-1.2:-1    2.0           SLAVE     FAIL 
Address: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001074b02.00
Node name: SWITCH 
Remote Routed      0.0           MASTER     -- 
Address: 00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00
Node name: 
-------------------- Provisioning Parameters -------------------- 
Connection Type: VPC             Cast Type: Point-to-Point 
Service Category: UBR            Conformance: UBR.1 
Bearer Class: BCOB-VP 
Last Fail Cause: N/A                  Attempts: 0
Continuity Check: Disabled       Frame Discard: Disabled 
L-Utils: 0   R-Utils: 0   Max Cost: 0   Routing Cost: 0
OAM Segment Ep: Enabled 
---------- Traffic Parameters ----------
Tx PCR: 353208        Rx PCR: 353208 
Tx CDV: N/A           Rx CDV: N/A 
Tx CTD: N/A           Rx CTD: N/A 


Where:

The dnpnport command brings down the port so that it can be configured. In this example, the dnpnport 9.2 command indicates slot 9 and the VPC partition.


Note In the dsppnport port_id command, the port_id = slot#.part, where part options are 1 = VCC; 2 = VPC.


The cnfpnportsig 9.2 -univer none command disables PNNI signaling on the RPM-PR is in slot 9.

The uppnport command brings up the ports after configuration is complete.

After configuring switch connection vpc 2 master remote on slave (Edge LSR1), you use the dspcon command on the PXM to get the slave NSAP address. In the dspcon 9.2 2 command, the final 2 is the VPC value.

RPM -PR Edge LSR2 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

This example uses the switch partition vpc command and therefore, you can use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. If you create a VP tunnel between two routers, you need to configure VPC partitioning and PNNI signaling to bring up the PVP. Then you can run the LC-ATM interface on the PVP.


Note In the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, the partition resources of the switch ports are configured at the RPM-PR. In the Cisco BPX switch, you configure all resources in the switch.


Following is a sample configuration for the RPM-PR Edge LSR2:

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 12.12.12.12 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
atm pvp 2 10000
switch partition vpc 1 2 
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 1 255
vci 0 65535
!
interface Switch1.2 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0
pvc 2/0 
mpls atm control-vc 2 32
mpls atm vpi 2 vci 33-65518
mpls ip
switch connection vpc 2 master local raddr 
47.0091.8100.0000.0001.4226.5fb2.0000.0107.4b02.00 2 
!
!router ospf 100
network 12.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0
!
dspcon 9.2 2

Port               Vpi Vci       Owner     State 
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Local 9:-1.2:-1    2.0           SLAVE      OK
Address: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001074b02.00
Node name: SWITCH 
Remote Routed      0.0           MASTER     OK 
Address: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076302.00
Node name: 
-------------------- Provisioning Parameters -------------------- 
Connection Type: VPC            Cast Type: Point-to-Point 
Service Category: UBR           Conformance: UBR.1 
Bearer Class: BCOB-VP 
Last Fail Cause: No Fail               Attempts: 0
Continuity Check: Disabled      Frame Discard: Disabled 
L-Utils: 100   R-Utils: 100   Max Cost: -1   Routing Cost: 0
OAM Segment Ep: Enabled 
---------- Traffic Parameters ----------
Tx PCR: 353208      Rx PCR: 353208 
Tx CDV: N/A         Rx CDV: N/A 
Tx CTD: N/A         Rx CTD: N/A 

Where:

The 1,100 in the ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

The NSAP ATM address for the switch connection command is found by entering the dspcon command on the PXM-45 card.

Executing the dspcon 9.2 2 command, for example, at the end of the configuration should show both local (slave) and remote (master) addresses.

PXM-45 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

This illustrates the PXM configuration for VPC switch partitioning for a PVP when all devices exist on the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

dnpnport 12.2 
cnfpnportsig 12.2 -univer none
uppnport 12.2

Where:

The dnpnport command brings down the port so that it can be configured. In this example, the dnpnport 12.2 command brings down port 12 and the VPC partition.


Note In the dsppnport port_id command, the port_id = slot#.part, where part options are 1 = VCC; 2 = VPC.


The cnfpnportsig 12.2 -univer none command disables PNNI signaling for the RPM-PR in slot 12.

The uppnport command brings up the ports after configuration is complete.

Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR Connected to an External Device

These sample configurations illustrate a permanent virtual path (PVP) ATM MPLS network with the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PR in the Cisco MGX 8850 switch connected to an external device (a Cisco 7200 router, for example). Figure 9 illustrates a PVP configuration with the RPM-PR in the Cisco MGX 8850 switch connected to a Cisco 7200 Edge LSR for the configuration examples that follow.

RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration (VPC Switch Partition)

PXM-45 Configuration (Switch Partition VPC)

Configuration for Cisco 7200 Edge LSR2

Figure 9 RPM-PR in Cisco MGX 8850 Switch Connected to Cisco 7200 Edge LSR


Note If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45. Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate. Use the cnfcbclk cb42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus.


These examples use the switch partition vpc command and therefore, you can use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. If you create a VP tunnel between two routers, you need to configure VPC partitioning and PNNI signaling to bring up the PVP. Then you can run the LC-ATM interface on the PVP.

Between Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PRs, you can use signaled connections, soft permanent virtual circuit (SPVC) and soft permanent virtual path (SPVP) connections, using PNNI. For this type of connection with VPC partitions, you can use any VPI = 1 to 256. You can run MPLS on SPVCs or SPVPs. With MPLS, you can configure the following:

On the SPVCs—Packet MPLS Downstream Unsolicited TDP or LDP

On the SPVPs—LC-ATM Downstream on Demand TDP or LDP

If you are connecting the Cisco RPM-PR Edge LSR with other routers, such as the Cisco 7200 router, the Cisco 12000 router, or the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the Cisco 7200 router, then you need to connect these routers through AXSM or AXSM-E cards. The Cisco 7200, and Cisco 12000 routers, and the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the Cisco 7200 router cannot use PNNI signaling. You need to do the following:

Start the SPVCs and SPVPs from the RPM-PR and terminate them in the AXSM or AXSM-E cards. (PNNI signaling makes the connection between the RPM-PR and the AXSM or AXSM-E cards.)

Provision the PVC and PVP connections manually at the Cisco 7200,and Cisco 12000 routers, and the Cisco BPX or Cisco IGX switch with the Cisco 7200 router.

RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration (VPC Switch Partition)

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 10.12.12.12 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
atm pvp 12 100000 
switch partition vpc 1 2
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 20 100
egress-percentage-bandwidth 20 100
vpi 1 100
vci 0 65535
!
interface Switch1.12 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0
pvc 12/0 
ubr 100000 
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12 vci-range 33-65518
mpls ip
switch connection vpc 12 master remote 
!
router ospf 100
network 12.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The atm pvp 12 100000 command configures a PVP with PCR = 100000 Kbps. You calculate the AXSM endpoints = about 235900 based on this value of 100000 Kbps ((100000 x 1000) divided by (53 x 8)).

In the pvc 12/0 command, the PVC should be the VPI of the SPVP and a VCI =  0.

The switch connection vpc 12 master remote command enables PNNI to set up SPVP 12.

PXM-45 Configuration (Switch Partition VPC)

The following examples show PVP-based ATM MPLS network configurations for the AXSM and PXM-45 cards.

At the AXSM SWITCH.11.AXSM.a> prompt:

upln 1.2
addport 2 1.2 40000 40000 4 2
addpart 2 1 2 235900 235900 235900 235900 1 100 32 65535 10 100

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:


addcontroller 2 i 27 PNNI
dnport 9.2
cnfpnportsig 9.2 -univer none 
uppnport 9.2
!
dspports

ifNum Line Admin Oper. Guaranteed Maximum   Port SCT Id  ifType  VPI
           State State Rate       Rate      VNNI only)
----- ---- ----- ----- ---------- -------- ------------- ------ ------
1    1.1   Up    Down  353207     353207     5            UNI    0 
2    1.2   Up    Up    40000      40000      4            NNI    0 

At the AXSM SWITCH.11.AXSM.a> prompt:

dspport 2

Interface Number     : 2
  Line Number          : 1.2
  Admin State          : Up      Operational State   : Up
  Guaranteed bandwidth(cells/sec): 40000      Number of partitions: 1
  Maximum bandwidth(cells/sec)   : 40000      Number of SPVC :      0
  ifType               : NNI                  Number of SPVP :      0
  Port SCT Id          : 4 
  VPI number(VNNI only)          : 0          Number of SVC  :      0

dspport 1

Interface Number      : 1
  Line Number           : 1.1
  Admin State           : Up        Operational State : Down
  Guaranteed bandwidth(cells/sec): 353207    Number of partitions: 1
  Maximum bandwidth(cells/sec)   : 353207    Number of SPVC      : 0
  ifType                : UNI       Number of SPVP    : 0
  Port SCT Id           : 5 
  VPI number(VNNI only) : 0         Number of SVC     : 0

dsppart 2 1

Interface Number       : 2
  Partition Id           : 1        Number of SPVC: 0
  Controller Id          : 2        Number of SPVP: 0
  egr Guaranteed bw(.0001percent): 1000000    Number of SVC : 0
  egr Maximum bw(.0001percent)   : 1000000
  ing Guaranteed bw(.0001percent): 1000000
  ing Maximum bw(.0001percent)   : 1000000
  min vpi                : 1
  max vpi                : 100
  min vci                : 32
  max vci                : 65535
  guaranteed connections : 10
  maximum connections    : 100

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

dspcons

Local Port    Vpi.Vci     remote Port     Vpi.Vci   State   Owner
----------------------------+-----------------------------+-------+------
9.1           0 2000      12.1            0 2000      OK    SLAVE 
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001074b01.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076301.00
12.1          0 2000      9.1             0 2000      OK    MASTER
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076301.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001074b01.00
12.2           12 0       Routed          0 0        FAIL  SLAVE 
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076302.00
Remote Addr: 00.000000000000000000000000.000000000000.00 

At the AXSM SWITCH.11.AXSM.a> prompt:

addcon 2 12 0 8 1 -slave 47009181000000000142265fb200000107630200.12.0 -lpcr
8000 -rpcr 8000
master endpoint added successfully
master endpoint id : 47009181000000000142265FB20000010B180200.12.0

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

dspcons

Local Port    Vpi.Vci     Remote Port     Vpi.Vci    State  Owner
----------------------------+-----------------------------+-------+------
9.1           0 2000      12.1            0 2000     OK     SLAVE 
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001074b01.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076301.00
12.1          0 2000      9.1             0 2000     OK     MASTER
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076301.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001074b01.00
12.2          12 0        11:1.2:2        12 0       OK     SLAVE 
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076302.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.0000010b1802.00
11:1.2:2      12 0        12.2            12 0       OK     MASTER
Local Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.0000010b1802.00
Remote Addr: 47.009181000000000142265fb2.000001076302.00
master endpoint id : 47009181000000000142265FB20000010B180200.12.0

Where:

The cnfpnportsig 9.2 -univer none command configures the signaling for the RPM-PR's switch interface 1.12.

Configuration for Cisco 7200 Edge LSR2

ip cef 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 10.9.9.9 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.9 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 12
mpls ip
!
router ospf 100
network 10.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

PXM-45 Configuration with VPC Switch Partition

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

dnport 11:1.2:2
cnfpnportsig 11:1.2:2 -univer none 
uppnport 11:1.2:2 

Where:

The cnfpnportsig 11:1.2:2 -univer none command configures the signaling for the AXSM at slot 11 and line 1.2.

Simple PVC-Based Packet MPLS Network Configuration

This section contains configuration examples for a simple permanent virtual circuit (PVC) packet MPLS network. For this example all devices are in the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch. Figure 10 illustrates a PVC packet MPLS network with all devices in the same Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

PXM-45 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

RPM-PR Edge LSR2 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

Figure 10 PVC Packet MPLS Network with All Devices in the Same Cisco MGX 8850 Switch


Note If two RPM-PRs in adjacent slots share the same cellbus, you need to configure a clock rate of 42 MHz on the PXM-45. Use the dspcbclk command to display the clock rate. Use the cnfcbclk cb42 command to change the clock rate, where n is the number of the cellbus.


RPM-PR Edge LSR1 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, you can use only VCI ranges; you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. To create and bring up a PVC between two routers, you need to configure VCC partitioning and PNNI signaling. Then you can run packet-based MPLS for the PVC.


Note In the Cisco BPX or IGX switches, all resources are configured in the switch.


ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 9.9.9.9 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
switch partition vcc 1 2    
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 32 3808
!
interface Switch1.2 point-to-point 
ip unnumbered Loopback0
pvc 0/2000 
oam-pvc manage 
encapsulation aal5snap
!
mpls ip
switch connection vcc 0 2000 master remote 
!
router ospf 100
network 9.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The switch partition vcc 1 2 command configures the VCC switch partition. The PNNI partition ID = 1 and the PNNI controller ID = 2.

The 1, 100 in the ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100 command guarantees 1 percent of the bandwidth to that partition. The partition can use up to 100 percent of the bandwidth.

In the interface Switch1.2 point-to-point command, the interface is 1.2.

The oam-pvc manage command configures Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) to check the end-to-end PVC link status.

The switch connection vcc 0 2000 master remote command enables PNNI and makes the PVC (VPI=0, VCI=2000) connection. The command indicates that the remote peer is the master. You are on the slave side. You need to configure the slave side first. Then you can get the ATM NSAP address from the PXM that is required at the master side.

PXM-45 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

This example shows commands to configure the PXM-45 for a simple PVC packet MPLS network.

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

addcontroller 2 i 2 7 PNNI
dnpnport 9.1 
cnfpnportsig 9.1 -univer none
uppnport 9.1

dspcon 9.2 1 

Where:

The dnpnport 9.1 command brings the port down for configuration. The 9.1 indicates slot 9 and the VCC (1) partition.

The cnfpnportsig 9.1 -univer none command disables PNNI signaling for the RPM-PR in slot 9.

The uppnport command brings the port back up.

After configuring switch connection vcc 0 2000 master remote on the slave (Edge LSR1), use the dspcon command on the PXM-45 to get the slave NSAP address.

In the dspcon 9.2 1 command, the 1 is the VCC value.

RPM-PR Edge LSR2 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

This example uses the switch partition vcc command and therefore, you can use only VCI ranges; you cannot use VPI ranges or VP tunnels. To create and bring up a PVC between two routers, you need to configure VCC partitioning and PNNI signaling. Then you can run packet-based MPLS for the PVC.

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
ip address 12.12.12.12 255.255.255.255
!
interface Switch1
switch partition vcc 1 2    
ingress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
egress-percentage-bandwidth 1 100
vpi 0 0
vci 1501 3808
!
interface Switch1.2 point-to-point
ip unnumbered Loopback0
pvc 0/2000 
oam-pvc manage 
encapsulation aal5snap 
!
mpls ip 
switch connection vcc 0 2000 master local raddr 
47.0091.8100.0000.0001.4226.5fb2.0000.0107.4b01.00 0 2000
!
router ospf 100
network 12.0.0.0 0.255.255.255 area 0

Where:

The switch partition vcc 1 2 command configures the VCC switch partition. The PNNI partition ID = 1 and the PNNI controller  ID = 2.

The oam-pvc manage command configures Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) to check the end-to-end PVC link status.

The mpls ip command enables packet-based MPLS on the PVC.

In the command switch connection vcc 0 2000 master local raddr 47.0091.8100.0000.0001.4226.5fb2.0000.0107.4b01.00 0 2000, the NSAP ATM address is retrieved from the PXM-45 switch, using the dspcon command.

PXM-45 Configuration (Switch Partition VCC)

This example shows commands to configure the PXM-45 for a simple PVC packet MPLS network.

At the PXM-45 SWITCH.7.PXM.a> prompt:

addcontroller 2 i 2 7 PNNI
dnpnport 12.1 
cnfpnportsig 12.1 -univer none
uppnport 12.1

Where:

The dnpnport 12.1 command brings the port down for configuration. The 12.1 indicates slot 12 and the VCC (1) partition.

The cnfpnportsig 12.2 -univer none command disables PNNI for the RPM-PR is in slot 12.

The uppnport command brings the port back up.

Configuring the Cisco 6400 Universal Access Concentrator as an MPLS LSC

You can configure the Cisco 6400 Universal Access Concentrator (UAC) to operate as an MPLS LSC in an MPLS network. The hardware that supports MPLS LSC functionality on the Cisco 6400 UAC is described in the following sections.


Note If you configure a Cisco 6400 UAC with a node resource processor (NRP) to function as an LSC, disable MPLS Edge LSR functionality. Refer to the command mpls atm disable-headend-vc for information on disabling MPLS Edge LSR functionality. An NRP LSC should support transit label switch paths only through the controlled ATM switch under VSI control.


Cisco 6400 UAC Architectural Overview

A Cisco 6400 UAC can operate as an MPLS LSC if it incorporates the following components:

Node switch processor (NSP)— The NSP incorporates an ATM switch fabric, enabling the Cisco 6400 UAC to function as an ATM label switch router (ATM LSR) in a network. The NSP manages all the external ATM interfaces for the Cisco 6400 UAC.

Node route processor (NRP)—The NRP enables a Cisco 6400 UAC to function as an LSC. When you use the NRP as an LSC, however, you must not configure the NRP to perform other functions.

The NRP contains internal ATM interfaces that enable it to be connected to the NSP. However, the NRP cannot access the external ATM interfaces of the Cisco 6400 UAC. Only the NSP can access the external ATM interfaces.


Note A Cisco 6400 UAC chassis can accommodate multiple NRPs, including one dedicated to MPLS LSC functions. You cannot use an additional NRP as an MPLS LSC. However, you can use additional NRPs to run MPLS and perform other networking services.


ATM port adapter—The Cisco 6400 UAC uses an ATM port adapter to provide external connectivity for the NSP.

Figure 11 shows the components that you can configure to enable the Cisco 6400 UAC to function as an MPLS LSC.

Figure 11 Cisco 6400 UAC Configured as an MPLS LSC

Configuring Permanent Virtual Circuits and Permanent Virtual Paths

The NRP controls the slave ATM switch through the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) protocol. The VSI protocol operates over a permanent virtual circuit (PVC) that you configure. The PVC is dedicated to the virtual circuits (VCs) that the VSI control channel uses.

For the NRP to control an ATM switch through the VSI, cross-connect the control VCs from the ATM switch through the NSP to the NRP. The ATM switch uses defined control VCs for each BXM slot of the BPX chassis, enabling the LSC to control external XTagATM interfaces through the VSI.

Table 5 defines the PVCs that must be configured on the NSP interface connected to the BPX VSI shelf. These PVCs are cross-connected via the NSP to the NRP VSI master control port, which is running the VSI protocol.

For an NRP that is installed in slot 3 of a Cisco 6400 UAC chassis, the master control port would be ATM3/0/0 on the NSP. As shown in Figure 2, the BPX switch control interface is 12.1. The NSP ATM port connected to interface 12.1 is the ATM interface that is cross-connected to ATM3/0/0. Figure 2 shows that the BXM slaves in BPX slots 6 and 12 are configured as external XTagATM ports. The PVCs that must be cross-connected through the NSP are 0/45 for slot 6 and 0/51 for slot 12, respectively, as outlined in Table 5.

.

Table 5 VSI Interface Control PVCs for BPX VSI Slave Slots

BPX VSI Slave Slot
VSI Interface Control VC

1

0/40

2

0/41

3

0/42

4

0/43

5

0/44

6

0/45

7

0/46

8

0/47

9

0/48

10

0/49

11

0/50

12

0/51

13

0/52

14

0/53


Figure 12 shows the functional relationships among the Cisco 6400 UAC hardware components and the permanent virtual paths (PVPs) that you can configure to support MPLS LSC functionality.

Figure 12 Cisco 6400 UAC PVP Configuration for MPLS LSC Functions

All other MPLS LSC functions, such as routing, terminating LVCs, and LDP control VCs (default 0/32), can be accomplished by means of a separate, manually configured PVP (see the upper shaded area in Figure 12). The value of "n" for this manually configured PVP must be the same among all the associated devices (the NRP, the NSP, and the slave ATM switch). Because the NSP uses VP=0 for ATM Forum signaling and the BPX uses VP=1 for autoroute, the value of "n" for this PVP for MPLS LSC functions must be greater than or equal to 2, while not exceeding an upper bound.

Note that some Edge LSRs have ATM interfaces with limited VC space per virtual path (VP). For these interface types, you define several VPs. For example, the Cisco ATM Port Adapter (PA-A1) and the AIP interface are limited to VC range 33 through 1018. To use the full capacity of the ATM interface, configure four consecutive VPs. Make sure the VPs are within the configured range of the BPX.

For internodal BPX connections, it is suggested that you configure VPs 2 through 15; for Edge LSRs, it is suggested that you configure VPs 2 through 5. (See the IOS CLI command mpls atm vpi for examples of how to configure Edge LSRs; see the BPX command "cnfrsrc" described in the Cisco BPX 8600 Series documentation for examples of how to configure BPX service nodes.)

Control VC Setup for MPLS LSC Functions

After you connect the NRP, the NSP, and the slave ATM switch by means of manually configured PVPs (as shown in Figure 12), the NRP can control the slave ATM switch as though it is directly connected to the NRP. The NRP discovers the interfaces of the slave ATM switch and establishes the default control VC to be used in creating MPLS VCs.

The slave ATM switch shown in Figure 12 incorporates two external ATM interfaces (labeled 1 and 2) that are known to the NRP as XTagATM61 and XTagATM122, respectively. On interface 6.1 of the slave ATM switch, VC 0/32 is connected to VC 2/35 by the VSI protocol. On the NRP, VC 2/35 is terminated on interface XTagATM61 and mapped to VC 0/32, also by means of the VSI protocol. This mapping enables the LDP to discover MPLS LSC neighbors by means of the default control VC 0/32 on the physical interface. On interface 12.2 of the slave ATM switch, VC 0/32 is connected to VC 2/83 by the VSI protocol. On the NRP, VC 2/83 is terminated on interface XTagATM122 and mapped to VC 0/32.

Note that the selection of these VCs depends on the availability of VC space. Hence it is not predictable what physical VC will be mapped to the external default control VC 0/32 on the XTagATM interface. The control VC is shown as a PVC on the LSC, as opposed to a LVC, when you execute the IOS CLI command show xtagatm vc.

Configuring the Cisco 6400 UAC to Perform Basic MPLS LSC Operations

Figure 13 shows a Cisco 6400 UAC containing a single NRP that has been configured to perform basic MPLS LSC operations.

Figure 13 Typical Cisco 6400 UAC Configuration to Support MPLS LSC Functions


Note If the NRP incurs a fault that causes it to malfunction (in a single NRP configuration), the LVCs and routing paths pertaining to MPLS LSC functions are lost.



Note The loopback addresses must be configured with a 32-bit mask and be included in the relevant IGP or BGP routing protocol, as shown in the following example:
ip address 172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255


Defining the MPLS Control and IP Routing Paths

In the MPLS LSC topology shown in Figure 13, the devices labeled LSR1 and LSR2 are external to the Cisco 6400 UAC. These devices, with loopback addresses as their respective LDP identifiers, are connected to two separate interfaces labeled 6.1 and 12.2 on the slave ATM switch. Both LSR1 and LSR2 learn about each other's routes from the NRP by means of the data path represented as the thick dashed line in Figure 13. Subsequently, LVCs are established by means of LDP operations to create the data paths between LSR1 and LSR2 through the ATM slave switch.

Both LSR1 and LSR2 learn of the loopback address of the NRP and create a data path (LVCs) from each other that terminates in the NRP. These LVCs, called tailend LVCs, are not shown in Figure 13.

Disabling Edge LVCs

By default, the NRP requests LVCs for the next hop devices (the LSRs shown in Figure 13). The headend LVCs enable the LSC to operate as an edge LSR. Using the LSC as an edge LSR is not supported. Further, the NRP is dedicated to control the slave ATM switch. Therefore, the headend LVCs are not required.

If a Cisco 6400 UAC with an NRP is configured to function as an LSC, disable the edge LSR functionality. An NRP LSC should support transit label switch paths only through the ATM switch using the VSI protocol. To disable the LSC from acting as an edge LSR, see "Disabling the LSC from Acting as an Edge LSR" section.

Configuration Steps: Configuring Cisco 6400 UAC NRP as an MPLS LSC

To configure the Cisco 6400 UAC NRP as an MPLS LSC, perform the following steps:

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

Router(config)# interface loopback0
Router(config-if)# ip address 
172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
Router(config-if)# exit

Creates a software-only loopback interface that emulates an interface that is always up. Specify an interface number for the loopback interface. There is no limit on the number of loopback interfaces you can create.

Assigns an IP address to Loopback0. It is important that all loopback addresses in an MPLS network are host addresses, that is, with a mask of 255.255.255.255. Using a shorter mask can prevent MPLS-based VPN services from working correctly.

Step 2 

Router(config)# interface atm1/0/0
Router(config-if)# tag-control-protocol 
vsi
Router(config-if)# ip route-cache cef

Creates an ATM interface (atm1/0/0).

Enables the VSI protocol on the control interface ATM1/0/0.

Enables CEF on the interface

Step 3 

Router(config-if)# interface XTagATM61
Router(config-if)# extended-port atm1/0/0 
bpx 6.1

Creates an XTagATM interface (XTagATM61).

Associates the XTagATM interface with an external interface (BXP port 6.1) on the remotely controlled ATM switch.

atm1/0/0 identifies the ATM interface used to control the remote ATM switch.

Step 4 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
loopback0

Makes XTagATM61 an unnumbered interface and uses the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute. The interfaces in an ATM MPLS network should usually be unnumbered. This reduces the number of IP destination-prefixes in the routing table, which reduces the number of labels and LVCs used in the network.

Step 5 

Router(config-if)# mpls ip 
Router(config-if)# mpls atm vpi 2-5
Router(config-if)# exit

Enables MPLS on the XTagATM interface.

Limits the range so that the total number of VPIs does not exceed 4. For example:
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm vpi 10-13

Step 6 

Router(config-if)# interface XTagATM122
Router(config-if)# extended-port atm1/0/0 
bpx 12.2

Configures MPLS on another XTagATM interface and binds it to BPX port 12.2.

Step 7 

Router(config-if)# ip unnumbered 
loopback0

Makes XTagATM122 an unnumbered interface and uses the IP address of loopback 0 as a substitute. The interfaces in an ATM MPLS network should usually be unnumbered. This reduces the number of IP destination-prefixes in the routing table, which reduces the number of labels and LVCs used in the network.

Step 8 

Router(config-if)# mpls ip 
Router(config-if)# mpls atm vpi 2-5
Router(config-if)# exit

Enables MPLS on the XTagATM interface.

Limit the range so that the total number of VPIs does not exceed 4. For example:
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm vpi 10-13

Step 9 

Router(config)# ip cef 

Enables Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) switching.

Step 10 

Router(config)# mpls atm 
disable-headend-vc

Disables headend VC label advertisement.

Configuration Steps: Configuring the Cisco 6400 UAC NSP for MPLS Connectivity to the BPX Switch

To configure the Cisco 6400 UAC NSP for MPLS connectivity to the BXP switch, perform the following steps:

 
Command
Purpose

Step 1 

Router# show hardware
3/0   NRP   00-0000-00 .......

Shows the hardware connected to the Cisco 6400 UAC, including the position (3/0) of the NRP in the Cisco 6400 chassis, as shown in the sample output at the left.

Step 2 

Router(config)# interface atm3/0/0

Specifies the ATM interface for which you want to configure PVCs and PVPs.

Step 3 

Switch(config-if)# 
 atm pvc 0 40  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 40 
 atm pvc 0 41  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 41 
 atm pvc 0 42  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 42 
 atm pvc 0 43  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 43 
 atm pvc 0 44  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 44 
 atm pvc 0 45  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 45 
 atm pvc 0 46  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 46 
 atm pvc 0 47  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 47 
 atm pvc 0 48  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 48 
 atm pvc 0 49  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 49 
 atm pvc 0 50  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 50 
 atm pvc 0 51  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 51 
 atm pvc 0 52  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 52 
 atm pvc 0 53  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 53 

Configures the PVC for the VSI control channel1 , depending on which of the 14 slots in the Cisco BPX switch is occupied by a Cisco Broadband Switch Module (BXM). If you do not know the BPX slots containing a BXM, configure all 14 PVCs (as shown opposite) to ensure that the NSP functions properly.

However, if you know that Cisco BPX switch slots 10 and 12, for example, contain a BXM, you only need to configure PVCs corresponding to those slots, as shown below:

atm pvc 0 49 interface ATM1/0/0 0 49  
atm pvc 0 51  interface  ATM1/0/0 0 51 

Instead of configuring multiple PVCs, as shown opposite in this step, you can configure PVP 0 by deleting all well-known VCs. For example, you can use the command atm manual-well-known-vc delete on both interfaces and then configure PVP 0, as indicated below:

atm pvp 0 interface ATM1/0/0 0

Step 4 

Switch(config-if)# 
 atm pvp 2  interface  ATM1/0/0 2 
 atm pvp 3  interface  ATM1/0/0 3 
 atm pvp 4  interface  ATM1/0/0 4 
 atm pvp 5  interface  ATM1/0/0 5 

Configures the PVPs for the LVCs. For XTagATM interfaces, use the VPI range 2 through 5 (by issuing an mpls atm vpi 2-5 command). To use a different VPI range, configure the PVPs accordingly.

1 Do not enable MPLS on this interface.

Configuration Example: Configuring a Cisco 6400 NRP as an LSC

When you use the NRP as an MPLS LSC in the Cisco 6400 UAC, you must configure the NSP to provide connectivity between the NRP and the Cisco BPX switch. When configured in this way (as shown in Figure 14), the NRP is connected to the NSP by means of the internal interface ATM3/0/0, while external connectivity from the Cisco 6400 UAC to the Cisco BPX switch is provided by means of the external interface ATM1/0/0 from the NSP.

Figure 14 Cisco 6400 UAC NRP Operating as an LSC

Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NSP

6400 NSP:

!
interface ATM3/0/0
atm pvp 0 interface  ATM1/0/0 0
atm pvp 2 interface  ATM1/0/0 2 
atm pvp 3 interface  ATM1/0/0 3 
atm pvp 4 interface  ATM1/0/0 4 
atm pvp 5 interface  ATM1/0/0 5
atm pvp 6 interface  ATM1/0/0 6 
atm pvp 7 interface  ATM1/0/0 7 
atm pvp 8 interface  ATM1/0/0 8 
atm pvp 9 interface  ATM1/0/0 9
atm pvp 10 interface  ATM1/0/0 10 
atm pvp 11 interface  ATM1/0/0 11
atm pvp 12 interface  ATM1/0/0 12
atm pvp 13 interface  ATM1/0/0 13
atm pvp 14 interface  ATM1/0/0 14 
atm pvp 15 interface  ATM1/0/0 15

Note Instead of configuring multiple PVCs, you can also configure PVP 0 by deleting all well-known VCs. For example, you can use the command atm manual-well-known-vc delete on both interfaces and then configure PVP 0, as indicated below:
atm pvp 0 interface ATM1/0/0 0


Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NRP LSC1

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
 ip address 172.18.143.22 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM0/0/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 1.3
 mpls atm vpi 2-15
 mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 2.2
 mpls atm vpi 2-5
 mpls ip
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

BPX1 and BPX2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3
cnfrsrc 1.3 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NRP LSC2

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
 ip address 172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM0/0/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 1.3
 mpls atm vpi 2-15
 mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 2.2
 mpls atm vpi 2-5
 mpls ip
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc

Configuration for Edge LSR1

LSR1:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.132.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR2

LSR2:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.172.18 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuring the Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a Universal Router Module as an MPLS ATM-LSR

Cisco offers the Universal Router Module (URM) for the Cisco IGX 8400 series switches. The Universal Router Module is a blade for the IGX switch. The IGX switch with the URM supports MPLS and can function as an MPLS ATM-LSR. The following sections explain how to configure the IGX switch with the URM as an MPLS ATM-LSR.

Running the URM on the IGX requires Switch Software 9.3.20 or higher.

VSI

The Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) allows MPLS controllers to control the switch. Each URM in an IGX can be a VSI master or slave. The embedded router in the URM can be configured as a router. The embedded universal switching module (UXM) is always a VSI slave. The embedded router on the URM can act as a master to communicate with the slaves on the IGX and control switch resources.

ATM-LSR

The URM supports MPLS, enabling it to function as an ATM-LSR. The interfaces have the following functions:

LC-ATM-based ATM interfaces support the ATM-LSR.

ATM Edge LSR interfaces support MPLS imposition and disposition.


Note The URM cannot act as both an Edge LSR and ATM-LSR. You can disable the URM from acting as an Edge LSR with the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command. By default, the Edge LSR functionality is enabled.


Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a Universal Router Module Overview

The URM consists of a logically partitioned front card connected to a universal router interface (URI) back card. The front card contains an embedded UXM-E running an Administration firmware image, and an embedded router (based on the Cisco 3660 router) running a Cisco IOS image. The embedded UXM-E and the embedded router connect through a logical internal ATM interface, with capability equivalent to an OC-3 ATM port.


Note SWSW treats this interface as an OC-3 ATM port, and this interface is the only port on the embedded UXM-E that is visible to SWSW.


Unlike the Cisco 3660 router, which has one slot for the motherboard and six slots for network modules, the embedded router has three virtual slots with built-in interfaces (see Table 6).

Table 6 Interfaces Found on Embedded Router Virtual Slots

Slot
Name
Description

Slot 0

ATM 0/0

The internal ATM interface connected to the embedded UXM-E ATM port.

Slot 1

FE1/0 and FE1/1

Fast Ethernet interfaces connected to the Fast Ethernet ports on the BC-URI-2FE2V back card.

Slot 2

T1 2/0 and T1 2/1; E1 2/0 and E1 2/1

T1 or E1 interfaces connected to the T1 or E1 ports on the VWIC installed in the back card.


Because the URM front card contains both an embedded UXM-E and an embedded Cisco router, the front card runs two separate software images with two different download procedures. For the embedded UXM-E, the Administration firmware image (Version XAA) is downloaded and saved to the embedded UXM-E Flash memory through SWSW command-line interface (CLI) commands, which are documented in Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation and Configuration.

The embedded router runs Cisco IOS software. You can download and save the Cisco IOS image using standard Cisco IOS procedures as outlined in any documentation supporting Cisco IOS Release 12.1(5)YA or later (see the Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide).

The embedded UXM-E hardware is based on the UXM-E card for the Cisco IGX series and features 16-MB asynchronous DRAM, 8-MB Flash memory, and 8-KB BRAM. The embedded router hardware is based on the Cisco 3660 modular-access router and features 8-MB boot Flash SIMM, 32-MB Cisco IOS Flash SIMM, and 128-KB NVRAM.

The back card (BC-URI-2FE2VT1 or BC-URI-2FE2VE1) contains an installed voice and WAN interface card (VWIC) with a generic dual-port T1 or E1 digital voice interface.

URM Connections

The Cisco IGX backplane is a cell bus composed of four parallel data buses that transmit up to four cells at a time. This bus bandwidth is organized into allocated units called universal bandwidth units (UBUs), each capable of transmitting 4000 cells per second or 2000 fast packets per second. The Cisco IGX has a total of 584 UBUs, giving the Cisco IGX the capacity to transmit about 2 million cells or 1 million fast packets per second.

Each URM receives a default bandwidth from the Cisco IGX at power on. You can configure this default bandwidth by using the SWSW CLI cnfbusbw command. For more information on this and other SWSW commands, refer to the Cisco WAN Switching Command Reference.


Note Except for slots 1 and 2 (which are reserved for the NPM), all slots in the Cisco IGX can be used to support a URM. However, the total number of UBUs allocated to all cards supported in the Cisco IGX cannot exceed the total Cisco IGX backplane bandwidth.


Connections terminating on the URM can be virtual path connections (VPCs) or virtual channel connections (VCCs).

The Cisco IOS router in the URM connects to Cisco IGX WAN through an internal ATM interface on the URM card. Because the URM supports voice connections using either standard VoIP or Cisco proprietary VoATM configurations (using ATM PVCs on the internal ATM interface), the remote end of these connections is either an ATM PVC endpoint or a Frame Relay PVC endpoint.


Note For more information about the URM for Cisco IGX 8400, see the Update to Cisco IGX 8400 Series Installation and Configuration and Reference.


Configuration Example: Configuring a Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a URM as an MPLS ATM-LSR

The following example configures MPLS on ATM-LSRs and Edge LSRs. The examples use the appropriate ATM interfaces that are directly connected to IGX.

Figure 15 Cisco IGX 8400 Switch with a Universal Router Module

Configuration for Edge LSR 1

LSR1:

ip cef distributed 
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.132.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for ATM-LSR1

URM LSC1:

ip cef 
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 2.2.2.2 255.255.255.0
!
interface atm0/0
no shut
tag-control-protocol vsi id 1 
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM132
extended-port atm0/0 igx 1.3.2 
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 2
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port atm0/0 igx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for ATM-LSR2

URM LSC2

ip cef
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
interface loopback0
ip address 3.3.3.3 255.255.255.255
!
interface atm0/0
no shut 
tag-control-protocol vsi id 2 
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM132 
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port atm0/0 igx 1.3.2 
mpls atm vp-tunnel 2
mpls ip

interface XTagATM22
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port atm0/0 igx 2.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for IGX1 and IGX2

IGX1 and IGX2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3.2
cnftrk 1.3.2 100000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10      
0 N N Y Y Y CBR 2
cnfrsrc 1.3.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 2 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for Edge LSR2

7200 LSR2:

ip cef 
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.172.18 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Disabling the LSC from Acting as an Edge LSR

Using the MPLS LSC as a label edge device is not supported. Using the MPLS LSC as a label edge device introduces unnecessary complexity to the configuration. See the command mpls atm disable-headend-vc to disable edge LSR functionality on the LSC.

Disabling the LSC from acting as an edge LSR causes the LSC to stop initiating LSPs to any destination. Therefore, the number of LVCs used in the network is reduced. The LSC can still terminate tailend LVCs, if required.

You can prevent the terminating tailend LVCs from being created between the edge LSRs and LSCs. This helps prevent the unnecessary use of LVC resources in a slave ATM switch. You use the mpls request-labels for command with an access list to disable the creation of the LSPs. You can create an access list at an edge LSR to restrict the destinations for which a downstream-on-demand request is issued.

With downstream on demand, LVCs are depleted with the addition of each new node. These commands save resources by disabling the LSC from setting up unwanted LSPs. The absence of those LSPs allows traffic to follow the same path as control traffic.

The following example uses the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command to disable the LSC from functioning as an edge LSR. The following line is added to the LSC configuration:

mpls atm disable-headend-vc


Note For a Cisco 6400 UAC with an NRP configured to function as an LSC, disable the LSC from acting as an edge LSR. An NRP LSC should only support label switch paths through the controlled ATM switch under VSI control.


Feature 1: Creating Virtual Trunks

Virtual trunks provide connectivity for Cisco WAN MPLS switches through an ATM cloud, as shown in Figure 16. Because several virtual trunks can be configured across a given private/public physical trunk, virtual trunks provide a cost-effective means of connecting across an entire ATM network.

The ATM equipment in the cloud must support virtual path switching and transmission of ATM cells based solely on the VPI in the ATM cell header. The virtual path identifier (VPI) is provided by the ATM cloud administrator (that is, by the service provider).

Typical ATM Hybrid Network with Virtual Trunks

Figure 16 shows three Cisco WAN MPLS switching networks, each connected to an ATM network by a physical line. The ATM network links all three of these subnetworks to every other subnetwork with a fully meshed network of virtual trunks. In this example, each physical interface is configured with two virtual trunks.

Figure 16 Typical ATM Hybrid Network Using Virtual Trunks

A virtual trunk number (slot number.port number.trunk number) differentiates the virtual trunks found within a physical trunk port. In Figure 17, three virtual trunks (4.1.1, 4.1.2, and 4.1.3) are configured on a physical trunk that connects to the port 4.1 interface of a BXM.

Figure 17 Virtual Trunks Configured on a Physical Trunk

These virtual trunks are mapped to the XTagATM interfaces on the LSC. On the XTagATM interface, you configure the respective VPI value using the command mpls atm vp-tunnel vpi. This VPI should match the VPI in the ATM network. The label virtual circuits (LVCs) are generated inside this VP, and this VP carries the LVCs and their traffic across the network.

Virtual Trunking Benefits

Virtual trunks provide the following benefits:

Reduced costs—By sharing the resources of a single physical trunk among a number of virtual (logical) trunks, each virtual trunk provided by the public carrier needs to be assigned only as much bandwidth as needed for that interface, rather than the full T3, E3, OC-3, or OC-12 bandwidth of an entire physical trunk.

Migration of MPLS services into existing networks—VSI virtual trunks allow MPLS services to be carried over part of a network that does not support MPLS services. The part of the network that does not support such services may be a public ATM network, for example, that consists of switches that are not MPLS-enabled.

Virtual Trunking Restrictions

Virtual Trunk Bandwidth—The total bandwidth of all the virtual trunks on one port cannot exceed the maximum bandwidth of the port. Trunk loading (units of load) is maintained per virtual trunk, but the cumulative loading of all virtual trunks on a port is restricted by the transmit and receive rates for the port.

Maximum Virtual Trunks—The maximum number of virtual trunks that can be configured per card equals the number of virtual interfaces (VIs) on the BPX/IGX switch.

The BXM supports 32 virtual interfaces; hence, it supports up to 32 virtual trunks. Accordingly, you can have interfaces ranging from XTagATM411 to XTagATM4131 on the same physical interface.

The UXM supports 16 virtual interfaces. You can have interfaces ranging from XTagATM411 to XTagATM 4116.

Configuration Example: Configuring Virtual Trunks with Cisco 7200 LSCs

The network topology shown in Figure 18 incorporates two ATM-LSRs using virtual trunking to create an MPLS network through a private ATM Network. This topology includes:

Two LSCs (Cisco 7200 routers)

Two BPX switches

Two Edge LSRs (Cisco  7200 routers)


Note For the Cisco IGX switch, use the following commands:
extended-port atm1/0 descriptor 0.x.x.0
tag-control-protocol vsi slaves 32 id x
ip route-cache cef


Figure 18 ATM-LSR Virtual Trunking through ATM Network

Based on Figure 19, the following configuration examples are provided:

Configuration for LSC1 Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

Configuration for LSC2 Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for Edge LSR1

Configuration for Edge LSR2

Configuration for LSC1 Implementing Virtual Trunking

7200 LSC1:

ip cef 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM132
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 2
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

BPX1 and BPX2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3.2
cnftrk 1.3.2 100000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10      
0 N N Y Y Y CBR 2
cnfrsrc 1.3.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 2 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for LSC2 Implementing Virtual Trunking

7200 LSC2:

ip cef 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.18.143.22 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi 
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM132
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 2
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR1

LSR1:

ip cef distributed 
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.132.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR2

7200 LSR2:

ip cef 
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.172.18 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration Example: Configuring Virtual Trunking on Cisco 6400 NRP LSCs

The network topology shown in Figure 19 incorporates two ATM-LSRs using virtual trunking to create an MPLS network through a private ATM Network. This topology includes:

Two LSCs (Cisco 6400 UAC NRP routers)

Two BPX switches

Two Edge LSRs (Cisco 7200 routers)

Figure 19 Cisco 6400 NRP Operating as LSC Implementing Virtual Trunking

Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NSP

6400 NSP:

!
interface ATM3/0/0
atm pvp 0 interface  ATM1/0/0 0
atm pvp 2  interface  ATM1/0/0 2 
atm pvp 3  interface  ATM1/0/0 3 
atm pvp 4  interface  ATM1/0/0 4 
atm pvp 5  interface  ATM1/0/0 5
atm pvp 6  interface  ATM1/0/0 6 
atm pvp 7  interface  ATM1/0/0 7 
atm pvp 8  interface  ATM1/0/0 8 
atm pvp 9  interface  ATM1/0/0 9
atm pvp 10 interface  ATM1/0/0 10 
atm pvp 11 interface  ATM1/0/0 11
atm pvp 12 interface  ATM1/0/0 12
atm pvp 13 interface  ATM1/0/0 13
atm pvp 14 interface  ATM1/0/0 14 
atm pvp 15 interface  ATM1/0/0 15


Note Instead of configuring multiple PVCs, you can also configure PVP 0 by deleting all well-known VCs. For example, you can use the atm manual-well-known-vc delete command on both interfaces and then configure PVP 0, as indicated below:
atm pvp 0 interface ATM1/0/0 0


Configuration for Cisco 6400 UAC NRP LSC1 Implementing Virtual Trunking

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
 ip address 172.18.143.22 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM0/0/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM132
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 1.3.2
 mpls atm vp-tunnel 2
 mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 2.2
 mpls atm vpi 2-5
 mpls ip
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

BPX1 and BPX2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3.2
cnftrk 1.3.2 100000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10      
0 N N Y Y Y CBR 2
cnfrsrc 1.3.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 2 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for 6400 UAC NRP LSC2 Implementing Virtual Trunking

ip cef
!
interface Loopback0
 ip address 172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
!
!
interface ATM0/0/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM132
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 1.3.2
 mpls atm vp-tunnel 2
 mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
 ip unnumbered Loopback0
 extended-port ATM0/0/0 bpx 2.2
 mpls atm vpi 2-5
 mpls ip
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc

Configuration for Edge LSR1

LSR1:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.132.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR2

LSR2:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 172.22.172.18 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Feature 2: Using LSC Redundancy

LSC redundancy allows you to create a highly reliable IP network, one whose reliability is nearly equivalent to that provided by hot standby routing. Instead of using hot standby routing processes to create redundancy, this method uses a combination of LSCs, the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI), and IP routing paths with the same cost path for hot redundancy, or different costs for warm redundancy. The VSI allows multiple control planes (MPLS, PNNI, and voice) to control the same switch. Each control plane controls a different partition of the switch.

In the LSC redundancy model, two independent LSCs control the different partitions of the switch. Thus, two separate MPLS control planes set up connections on different partitions of the same switch. This is where LSC redundancy differs from hot standby redundancy. The LSCs do not need copies of each other's internal state to create redundancy. The LSCs control the partitions of the switch independently.

A single IP network consists of switches with one LSC (or a hot standby pair of LSCs) and MPLS edge label switch routers (LSRs).

If you change that network configuration by assigning two LSCs per switch, you form two separate MPLS control planes for the network. You logically create two independent parallel IP subnetworks linked at the edge.

If the two LSCs on each switch are assigned identical shares of the switch's resources and links, the two subnetworks are identical. You have two identical parallel IP subnetworks on virtually the same equipment, which would otherwise support only one network.

For example, Figure 20 shows a network of switches that each have two LSCs. MPLS Edge LSRs are located at the edge of the network, to form a single IP network. The LSCs on each switch have identical shares of the switch's resources and links, which makes the networks identical. In other words, there are two identical parallel IP subnetworks.

Figure 20 LSC Redundancy Model

Part of the redundancy model includes Edge LSRs, which link the two networks at the edge.

If the network uses Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) or a similar IP routing protocol with an equal cost on each path, then there are at least two equally viable paths from every Edge LSR to every other Edge LSR. The OSPF equal cost multipath distributes traffic evenly on both paths. Therefore, MPLS sets up two identical sets of connections for the two MPLS control planes. IP traffic travels equally across the two sets of connections.


Note The LSC redundancy model works with any routing protocol. For example, you can use Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) or Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS). Also, you can use both the Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP) and the Label Distribution Protocol (LDP).


With the LSC redundancy model, if one LSC on a switch fails, IP traffic uses the other path, without having to establish new links. LSC redundancy does not require the network to set up new connections when a controller fails. Because the connections to the other paths have already been established, the interruption to the traffic flow is negligible. The LSC redundancy model is as reliable as networks that use hot standby controllers. LSC redundancy requires hardware like that used by hot standby controllers. However, the controllers act independently, rather than in hot standby mode. For LSC redundancy to work, the hardware must have connection capacity for doubled-up connections.

If an LSC fails and LSC redundancy is not present, IP traffic halts until other switches break their present connections and reroute traffic around the failed controller. The stopped IP traffic results in undesirable unreliability.

Hot LSC Redundancy

Hot redundancy provides near-instant failover to the other path when an LSC fails. When you set up hot redundancy, both LSCs are active and have the same routing costs on both paths. To ensure that the routing costs are the same, run the same routing protocols on the redundant LSCs.

In hot redundancy, the LSCs run parallel and independent Label Distribution Protocols (LDPs). At the Edge LSRs, when the LDP has multiple routes for the same destination, it requests multiple labels. It also requests multiple labels when it needs to support class of service (CoS). When one LSC fails, the labels distributed by that LSC are removed.

To achieve hot redundancy, you can implement the following redundant components:

Redundant physical interfaces between the Edge LSR and the ATM-LSR to ensure reliability in case one physical interface fails.

Redundant interfaces or redundant VP tunnels between the ATM switches.

Slave ATM switches, such as the BPX 8650, can have redundant control cards and switch fabrics. If redundant switch fabrics are used and the primary switch fails, the other switch fabric takes over.

Redundant LSCs.

The same routing protocol running on both LSCs. (You can have different tag/label distribution protocols.)

Figure 21 shows one example of how hot LSC redundancy can be implemented.

Figure 21 Hot LSC Redundancy

Warm LSC Redundancy

To achieve warm redundancy, you need only redundant LSCs. You do not necessarily need to run the same routing protocols or distribution protocols on the LSCs.


Note You can use different routing protocols on parallel LSCs. However, you do not get near-instant failover. The failover time includes the time it takes to reroute the traffic, plus the LDP bind request time. If the primary routing protocol fails, the secondary routing protocol finds new routes and creates new label virtual circuits (LVCs). An advantage to using different routing protocols is that the ATM switch uses fewer resources and offers more robust redundancy.


If you run the same routing protocols, you specify a higher cost for the interfaces on the backup LSC. This causes the data to use only the lower-cost path. This also saves resources on the ATM switch, because the Edge LSR requests LVCs only through the lower-cost LSC. When the primary LSC fails, the Edge LSR uses the backup LSC and creates new paths to the destination. Creating new paths requires reroute time and LDP negotiation time.

Figure 22 shows one example of how warm LSC redundancy can be implemented.

Figure 22 Warm LSC Redundancy

Differences Between Hot and Warm LSC Redundancy

Virtually any configuration of switches and LSCs that provides hot redundancy can also provide warm redundancy. You can also switch from warm to hot redundancy with little or no change to the links, switch configurations, or partitions.

Hot and warm redundancy differ in the following ways:

Hot redundancy uses both paths to route traffic. You set up both paths using equal cost multipath routing, so that traffic is load balanced between the two paths. As a result, hot redundancy uses twice the number of MPLS label VCs as warm redundancy.

Warm redundancy uses only one path at a time. You set up the paths so that one path has a higher cost than the other. Traffic only uses one path and the other path is a backup path.

General Redundancy Operational Modes

The LSC redundancy model allows you to use the following four operational models. Most other redundancy models cannot accommodate all of these redundancy models.

Transparent Mode—The primary and secondary redundant systems have the same copies of the image and startup configurations. When one system fails, the other takes over, and the operations are identical. However, this mode risks software failures, because both systems use the same algorithms. A software problem on the primary system is likely to affect the secondary system as well.

Upgrade mode—You can upgrade the image or configuration of the redundant system, without rebooting the entire system. You can use this mode to change the resources between different partitions of the slave ATM switch.

Nontransparent mode—The primary and secondary systems have different images or configurations. This mode is more reliable than transparent mode, which loads the same software on both controllers. In nontransparent mode, the use of different images and configurations reduces the risk of both systems encountering the same problem.

Experimental mode—You load an experimental version of the image or configuration on the secondary system. You can use experimental mode when you want to test the new images in a real environment.

How LSC Redundancy Differs from Router and Switch Redundancy

In traditional IP router networks, network managers ensure reliability by creating multiple paths through the network from every source to every destination. If a device or link on one path fails, IP traffic uses an alternate path to reach its destination.

LSC Redundancy

Connecting two independent LSCs to each switch by the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) creates two identical subnetworks. Multipath IP routing uses both subnetworks equally. Thus, both subnetworks have identical connections. If a controller in one subnetwork fails, the multipath IP routing diverts traffic to the other path. Because the connections already exist in the alternate path, the reroute time is very fast. The LSC redundancy model matches the reliability of networks with hot standby controllers, without the difficulty of implementing hot standby redundancy.

Router Redundancy

Because routers do not need to establish a virtual circuit to transfer data, they are inherently connectionless. When a router discovers a failed device or link, it requires approximately less than a second to reroute traffic from one path to another.

Routers can incorporate a warm or hot standby routing process to increase reliability. The routing processes share information about the routes to direct different streams of IP traffic. They do not need to keep or share connection information. Routers can also include redundant switch fabrics, backplanes, power supplies, and other components to decrease the chances of node failures.

ATM, Frame Relay, and Circuit Switch Redundancy

Circuit switch, ATM, and Frame Relay networks transfer data by establishing circuits or virtual circuits. To ensure the transfer of data in switches, network managers incorporate redundant switch components. If any component fails, a spare component takes over. Switches can have redundant line cards, power supplies, fans, backplanes, switch fabrics, line cards, and control cards.

The redundant backplanes include all the hardware to operate two backplanes and to switch to the backup backplane if one fails.

Redundant line cards protect against failed links. If a link to a line card fails, the redundant line card takes over. To create redundant line cards, you must program the same connection information into both line cards. This ensures that the circuits or virtual circuits are not disrupted when the new line card takes over.

The redundant switch fabric must also have the same connection information as the active switch fabric.

A software application usually monitors the state of the switches and their components. If a problem arises, the software sets an alarm to bring attention to the faulty component.

The redundant switch hardware and software are required, because switches take some time to reroute traffic when a failure occurs. Switches can have connection routing software, such as Cisco automatic connection routing, PNNI, or MPLS. However, rerouting the connections in a switch takes much more time than rerouting traffic in a router network. Rerouting connections in a switch requires calculating routes and reprogramming some hardware for each connection. In router networks, large aggregates of traffic can be rerouted simultaneously, with little or no hardware programming. Therefore, router networks can reroute traffic more quickly and easily than connection-oriented networks. Router networks rely on rerouting techniques to ensure reliability. Connection-oriented networks use rerouting only as a last resort.

General Hot/Warm Standby Redundancy in Switches

Network managers can install redundant copies of the connection routing software for ATM and Frame Relay switches on a redundant pair of control processors.

With hot standby redundancy, the active process sends its state to the spare process to keep the spare process up to date in case it needs to take over. The active process sends the state information to the spare process or writes the state to a disk, where both processes can access the information. In either case, the state information is shared between controllers. Because the state of the network routing tables changes frequently, the software must perform much work to maintain consistent routing states between redundant pairs of controllers.

With warm standby redundancy, the state information is not shared between the active and spare processes. If a failure occurs, the spare process resets all of the connections and re-establishes them. Reliability decreases when the spare resets the connections. The chance of losing data increases.

LSC Redundancy Benefits

By implementing the LSC redundancy model, you eliminate the single point of failure between the LSC and the ATM switch it controls. If one LSC fails, the other LSC takes over and routes the data on the other path. The following sections explain the other benefits of LSC redundancy.

LSC Redundancy Does Not Use Shared States or Databases

In the LSC redundancy model, the LSCs do not share states or databases, which increases reliability. Sometimes, when states and databases are shared, an error in the state or database information can cause both controllers to fail simultaneously.

Also, new software features and enhancements do not affect LSC redundancy. Because the LSCs do not share states or database information, you do not have to worry about ensuring redundancy during every step of the update.

LSC Redundancy Allows Different Software Versions

The LSCs work independently and there is no interaction between the controllers. They do not share the controller's state or database, as other redundancy models require. Therefore, you can run different versions of the IOS software on the LSCs, which provides the following advantages:

You can test the features of the latest version of software without risking reliability. You can run the latest version of the IOS software on one LSC and an older version of the IOS software on a different LSC. If the LSC running the new IOS software fails, the LSC running the older software takes over.

Running different versions of the IOS software reduces the chance of having both controllers fail. If you run the same version of the IOS software on both controllers and that version contains a problem, it could cause both controllers to fail. Running different versions on the controllers eliminates the possibility of each controller failing because of the same problem.


Note Using different IOS software version on different LSCs is recommended only as a temporary measure. Different versions of IOS software in a network could be incompatible, although it is unlikely. For best results, run the same version of IOS software on all devices.


LSC Redundancy Allows You to Use Different Router Models

You can use different models of routers in this LSC redundancy model. Using different hardware in the redundancy model reduces the chance that a hardware fault would interrupt network traffic.

LSC Redundancy Allows You to Switch from Hot to Warm Redundancy on the Fly

You can implement hot or warm redundancy and switch from one model to the other. Hot redundancy can use redundant physical interfaces, slave ATM switches with Y redundancy, and redundant LSCs. This enables parallel paths and near-instant failover. If your resources are limited, you can implement warm redundancy, which uses only redundant LSCs. When one controller fails, the backup controller requires some reroute time. As your network grows, you can switch from hot to warm redundancy and back, without bringing down the entire network.

Other redundancy models require complex hardware and software configurations, which are difficult to alter when you change the network configuration. You must manually change the connection routing software from hot standby mode to warm standby mode.

LSC Redundancy Provides an Easy Migration from Standalone LSCs to Redundant LSCs

You can migrate from a standalone LSC to a redundant LSC and back again without affecting network operations. Because the LSCs work independently, you can add a redundant LSC without interrupting the other LSC.

LSC Redundancy Allows Configuration Changes in a Live Network

The hot LSC redundancy model provides two parallel, independent networks. Therefore, you can disable one LSC without affecting the other LSC. This feature has the following benefits:

LSC redundancy model facilitates configuration changes and updates. After you finish with configuration changes or image upgrades to the LSC, you can add the LSC back to the network and resume the LSC redundancy model.

The redundancy model protects the network during partitioning of the ATM switch. You can disable one path and perform partitioning on that path. While you are performing the partitioning, data uses the other path. The network is safe from the effects of the partitioning, which include breaking/establishing LVC connections.

LSC Redundancy Provides Fast Reroute in IP+ATM Networks

The hot LSC redundancy model offers redundant paths for every destination. Therefore, reroute recovery is very fast. Other rerouting processes in IP+ATM networks require many steps and take more time.

In normal IP+ATM networks, the reroute process consists of the following steps:

Detecting the failure

Converging the Layer 2 routing protocols

Completing label distribution for all destinations

Establishing new connections for all destinations

After this reroute process, the new path is ready to transfer data. Rerouting data using this process takes time.

The hot LSC redundancy method allows you to quickly reroute data in IP+ATM networks without using the normal reroute process. When you incorporate hot LSC redundancy, you create parallel paths. Every destination has at least one alternative path. If a device or link along the path fails, the data uses the other path to reach its destination. The hot LSC redundancy model provides the fastest reroute recovery time for IP+ATM networks.

LSC Redundancy Restrictions

Hot LSC Redundancy Restrictions

The following list explains the items you need to consider when implementing hot LSC redundancy:

LSC hot redundancy needs parallel paths. Specifically, there must be the capacity for at least two end-to-end parallel paths traveling from each source to each destination. Each path is controlled by one of a pair of redundant LSCs.

Label switch paths (LSPs) for the destinations are initiated from the Edge LSR. The Edge LSR initiates multiple paths for a destination only if it has parallel paths to its next hop. Therefore, it is important to have parallel paths from the Edge LSR. You can achieve parallel paths by having two physical links from the Edge LSR or by having two separate VP tunnels on one link.

Hot redundancy protection extends from the Edge LSR only as far as parallel paths are present. So, it is best if parallel paths are present throughout the entire network.

Hot redundancy increases the number of VCs used in the network. Each physical link with two VSI partitions has twice the number of VCs used than would otherwise be the case. Various techniques can be used to alleviate VC usage. The use of unnumbered links ("ip unnumbered" in the IOS link configuration) reduces the number of routes in the routing table and hence the number of VCs required. On the LSCs, you can use the command mpls atm disable-headend-vc to disable Edge LSR functionality on the LSC and also reduce the number of VCs used. The mpls request-labels for command with an access list also restricts the creation of LVCs.

Warm LSC Redundancy Restrictions

The following list explains the items you need to consider when implementing warm LSC redundancy:

LSC warm redundancy needs a single active path between the source and destination. However, there is also a requirement for end-to-end parallel paths, as in the hot redundancy case. Only one path has an active LSP for the destination. In the event of the failure, the other path is established, with some delay due to rerouting.

The number of VCs in the network does not change with the warm redundancy.

Hot LSC redundancy achieves failure recovery with little loss of traffic. However, hot redundancy doubles the VC requirements in the network. Warm LSC redundancy requires the same number of VCs as a similar network without LSC redundancy. However, traffic loss due to a failure is greater; traffic may be lost for a period of seconds during rerouting.


Note The precise traffic loss depends on the type of failure. If the failure is in an LSC, the LSPs controlled by that LSC typically remain connected for some time. Traffic can still flow successfully on the "failed" path until the Edge LSRs switch all traffic to the alternate path (which might occur tens of seconds later, depending on routing protocol configuration). The only traffic loss might occur in the Edge LSR when traffic changes to the new path, which typically takes a few milliseconds or less.


Configuring LSC Redundancy

To make an LSC redundant, you can partition the resources of the slave ATM switch, implement a parallel VSI model, assign redundant LSCs to each switch, and create redundant LSRs. The following sections explain each of these steps.

Partitioning the Resources of the ATM Switch

In the LSC redundancy model, two LSCs control different partitions of the ATM switch. When you partition the ATM switch for LSC redundancy, use the following guidelines:

Make the MPLS partitions identical. If you create two partitions, make sure both partitions have the same amount of resources. (You can have two MPLS VSI partitions per switch.) Use the cnfrsrc command to configure the partitions.

If the partitions are on the same switch card, perform the following:

Create different control VCs for each partition. For example, there can be only one (0, 32) control VC on the XTagATM interface. To map two XTagATM interfaces on the same ATM switch interface, use a different control VC for the second LSC. Use the mpls atm control-vc command.

Create the LVC on the XTagATM interfaces using nonintersecting VPI ranges. Use the mpls atm vpi command.

Specify the bandwidth information on the XTagATM interfaces. Normally, this information is read from the slave ATM switch. When you specify the bandwidth on the XTagATM interface, the value you enter takes precedence over the switch-configured interface bandwidth.

Configure the logical channel number (LCN) ranges for each partition according to the expected number of connections.

See the documentation on the Cisco BPX 8600 series or Cisco IGX 8400 series switches for more information about configuring the slave ATM switch.

Implementing the Parallel VSI Model

The parallel VSI model means that the physical interfaces on the ATM switch are shared by more than one LSC. For instance, LSC1 maps VSI slave interfaces 1 to N to the ATM switch's physical interfaces 1 to N. LSC2 maps VSI slave interfaces to the ATM switch's physical interfaces 1 to N. LSC1 and LSC2 share the same physical interfaces on the ATM switch. With this mapping, you achieve fully meshed independent masters.

Figure 23 shows four ATM physical interfaces mapped as four XTagATM interfaces at LSC1 and LSC2. Each LSC is not aware that the other LSC is mapped to the same interfaces. Both LSCs are active all the time. The ATM switch runs the same VSI protocol on both partitions.

Figure 23 XTagATM Interfaces

Adding Interface Redundancy

To ensure reliability throughout the LSC redundant network, you can also implement:

Redundant interfaces between the Edge LSR and the ATM-LSR. Most Edge LSRs are colocated with the LSCs. Creating redundant interfaces between the Edge LSRs and the ATM LSRs reduces the chance of a disruption in network traffic by providing parallel paths.

Redundant virtual trunks and VP tunnels between slave ATM switches. To ensure hot redundancy between the ATM switches, you can create redundant virtual trunks and VP tunnels. See Figure 24.

Figure 24 Interface Redundancy

Configuration Example: Configuring LSC Hot Redundancy

The network topology shown in Figure 25 incorporates two ATM-LSRs in an MPLS network. This topology includes two LSCs on each BPX node and four Edge LSRs.

Figure 25 ATM-LSR Network Configuration Example

The following configuration examples show the label-switching configuration for both standard downstream-on-demand interfaces and downstream-on-demand over a VP-tunnel. The difference between these two types of configurations is:

Standard interface configuration configures a VPI range of one or more VPIs while LDP control information flows in PVC 0,32.

VP-tunnel, on the other hand, configures a single VPI (for example, vpi 12) and uses an mpls atm control-vc of vpi,32 (i.e. 12,32). You can use a VP-tunnel to establish label-switching neighbor relationships through a private ATM cloud.

The following configuration examples are provided in this section.


Note For the Cisco IGX switch, use the following commands:
extended-port atm1/0 descriptor 0.x.x.0
tag-control-protocol vsi slaves 32 id x
ip route-cache cef



Note In the following configuration examples for the LSCs, you can use the mpls request-labels for command instead of the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command.


Configuration for LSC 1A

7200 LSC 1A:

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi id 1
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM12
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM15
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.5
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM1612
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.6.12
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM2612
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.6.12
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12
mpls ip

Configuration for LSC 1B

7200 LSC 1B:

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.6 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi id 2
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM22
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM25
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.5
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM1622
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.6.22
mpls atm vp-tunnel 22
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM2622
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.6.22
mpls atm vp-tunnel 22
mpls ip

Configuration for LSC 2A

7200 LSC 2A:

ip cef  
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.7 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi id 1
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM12
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM15
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.5
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM1612
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.6.12
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM2612
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.6.12
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12
mpls ip

Configuration for LSC 2B

7200 LSC 2B:

ip cef 
!
mpls atm disable-headend-vc
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.8 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi id 2
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM22
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM25
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.5
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM1622
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.6.22
mpls atm vp-tunnel 22
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM2622
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.6.22
mpls atm vp-tunnel 22
mpls ip

Configuration for BPX-1 and BPX-2

BPX-1 and BPX-2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 vsi 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
upln 1.2
upport 1.2
cnfrsrc 1.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 5 26000 100000
uptrk 1.5
cnfrsrc 1.5 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.6.12
cnftrk 1.6.12 110000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,
       RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10 0 N N Y Y Y CBR 12
cnfrsrc 1.6.12 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 12 12 26000 100000
uptrk 1.6.22
cnftrk 1.6.22 110000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,
       RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10 0 N N Y Y Y CBR 22
cnfrsrc 1.6.22 256 252207 y 2 e 512 6144 22 22 26000 100000
uptrk 2.1
addshelf 2.1 vsi 2 2
cnfrsrc 2.1 256 252207 y 2 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
upln 2.2
upport 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 2 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000
uptrk 2.5
cnfrsrc 2.5 256 252207 y 2 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 2.6.12
cnftrk 2.6.12 110000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,
       RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10 0 N N Y Y Y CBR 12
cnfrsrc 2.6.12 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 12 12 26000 100000
uptrk 2.6.22
cnftrk 2.6.22 110000 N 1000 7F V,TS,NTS,FR,FST,CBR,NRT-VBR,ABR,
       RT-VBR N TERRESTRIAL 10 0 N N Y Y Y CBR 22
cnfrsrc 2.6.22 256 252207 y 2 e 512 6144 22 22 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for Edge LSR 7200-1

7200-1 Edge LSR:

ip cef 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.1 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.12 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address

interface ATM3/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR-1

Edge LSR:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.1612 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12
mpls ip
!
interface ATM2/0/0.1622 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 22
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR-2

Edge LSR:

ip cef distributed 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.3 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.12 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!!
interface ATM3/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM3/0/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR 7200-2

7200-2 Edge LSR:

ip cef 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.103.210.4 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.1612 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 12
mpls ip
!
interface ATM2/0.1622 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vp-tunnel 22
mpls ip

Configuration Example: Configuring LSC Warm Standby Redundancy

You can implement the configuration of LSC warm standby redundancy by configuring the redundant link for either a higher routing cost than the primary link or configuring a bandwidth allocation that is less desirable. You need to perform this only at the Edge LSR nodes, because the LSCs are configured to disable the creation of headend VCs, which reduces the LVC overhead.

Configuration Example: Configuring an Interface Using Two VSI Partitions

A special case may arise where a network topology can only support a neighbor relationship between peers using a single trunk or line interface. To configure the network, use the following procedure:


Step 1 Configure the interface to use both VSI partitions. The VSI partition configuration for the interface must be made with no overlapping vp space. For instance, for interface 2.8 on the ATM LSR, the following configuration is required:

uptrk 2.8
cnfrsrc 2.8 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
cnfrsrc 2.8 256 252207 y 2 e 512 6144 16 29 26000 100000

Thus partition 1 will create LVCs using VPIs 2-15 and partition 2 will create LVCs using VPIs 16-29.

Step 2 Configure the control-vc. Each LSC requires a control VC (default 0,32); however, only one LSC can use this default control-vc for any one trunk interface. The following command forces the control VC assignment:

mpls atm control-vc <vpi> <vci>

Therefore, LSC 1 XTagATM28 can use the default control-vc 0/32 (but it is suggested that you use 2/32 to reduce configuration confusion) and the LSC 2 XTagATM28 should use control-vc 16/32.



Note For the Cisco IGX switch, use the following commands:
extended-port atm1/0 descriptor 0.x.x.0
tag-control-protocol tag-control-protocol vsi slaves 32 id x
ip route-cache cef


The following example shows the configuration steps:

LSC1:

interface XTagATM2801
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.8
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls atm control-vc 2 32
mpls ip

LSC2:

interface XTagATM2802
ip unnumbered loopback0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.8
mpls atm vpi 16-29
mpls atm control-vc 16 32
mpls ip

Feature 3: Reducing the Number of Label Switch Paths Created in an MPLS Network

You can reduce the number of LSPs created in an MPLS networkby Disabling LSPs from being created from a edge LSR or LSC to a destination IP address. Use the mpls request-labels for command. Specify the destination IP addresses that you want to disable from creating LSPs. This command allows you to permit creation of some LSPs, while preventing the creation of others.

Using an Access List to Disable Creation of LSPs to Destination IP Addresses

You can prevent LSPs from being created between Edge LSRs and LSCs. This helps prevent the unnecessary use of LVC resources in a slave ATM switch. You use the mpls request-labels for command with an access list to disable the creation of the LSPs.

Some LSPs are often unnecessary between some Edge LSRs in an MPLS network. Every time a new destination is created, LSPs are created from all Edge LSRs in the MPLS network to the new destination. You can create an access list at an Edge LSR or LSC to restrict the destinations for which a downstream-on-demand request is issued.

For example, Figure 26 is an MPLS ATM network that consists of the following elements:

The PE routers in the virtual private network require LSPs to communicate with each other.

All the PE routers are in network 1 (192.168.x.x).

All the IGP IP addresses are in network 2 (172.16.x.x).

If numbered interfaces are required (for network management or other purposes), they are placed in network 2 (172.16.x.x).

Use mpls request-labels for commands to accomplish the following tasks:

Allow the PE routers in network 1 to create LSPs and communicate with each other.

Prevent LSPs from being created in network 2.

Performing these tasks reduces the number of LSPs in the MPLS ATM cloud, which reduces the VC usage in the cloud.

Figure 26 Sample MPLS ATM Network


Note When using access lists to prevent the creation of headend LVCs or LSPs, do not disable the LSC from acting as an Edge LSR with the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command, which prevents all LSPs from being established.


The following examples of the mpls request-labels for command use Figure 27 as a basis. The examples show different ways to disable the creation of LSPs from the LSC to the Edge LSR, and from the Edge LSRs to the LSC.

Figure 27 Sample Configuration for mpls request-labels for Command

Using a Numbered Access List

The following examples use a numbered access list to restrict creation of LSPs.

Preventing LSPs from the LSC to the Edge LSRs

The following example prevents LSPs from being established from the LSC to all 192.x.x.x destinations. However, transit LSPs are allowed between 192.x.x.x destinations. Add the following commands to the LSC configuration:

mpls request-labels for 1
access-list 1 deny 192.168.0.0 0.255.255.255
access-list 1 permit any

Preventing LSPs from the Edge LSRs to the LSC

The following example prevents headend LVCs from being established from Edge LSR 1 and Edge LSR 2 to the LSC (172.16.x.x). However, transit LSPs are allowed between 192.168.x.x destinations. Add the following commands to the Edge LSR 1 and 2 configurations:

mpls request-labels for 1
access-list 1 deny 172.16.0.0 0.255.255.255
access-list 1 permit any

Using a Named Access List

The following examples use a named access list to perform the same tasks as the previous examples:

mpls request-labels for nolervcs
ip access-list standard nolervcs
deny   192.168.0.0 0.255.255.255
permit any

mpls request-labels for nolervcs
ip access-list standard nolervcs
deny 172.16.0.0 0.255.255.255
permit any

Specifying Exact Match IP Addresses with an Access List

The following examples use exact IP addresses to perform the same tasks as the previous examples:

mpls request-labels for 1
access-list 1 deny 192.168.0.1 0.0.0.0
access-list 1 deny 192.168.0.2 0.0.0.0
access-list 1 permit any

mpls request-labels for 1
access-list 1 deny 172.16.53.1 0.0.0.0
access-list 1 permit any

Configuration Example: Using an Access List to Limit Headend VCs

The following example shows how to use an access list to control the creation of headend VCs in an MPLS network, which allows the network to support more destinations.

Figure 28 shows two Edge LSRs and two ATM-LSRs. In the configuration, only LSPs between Edge LSRs are required to provide label switched paths. Other LSPs are not essential. The LSPs between LSCs and between the LSCs and the Edge LSRs are often unused and required only for monitoring and maintaining the network. In such cases the IP forwarding path is sufficient.

Figure 28 Sample MPLS Network

In networks that require connections only between Edge LSRs, you can use the access list to eliminate the creation of unnecessary LSPs. This allows LVC resources to be conserved so that more Edge LSR connections can be supported.

To prevent creation of LSPs between LSCs, create an access list that denies all 172.16.0.0/24 addresses. Then, to prevent creation of LVCs from the LSCs to the Edge LSRs, create an access list that denies all 192.168.0.0/24 addresses. The configuration examples for LSC 1 and 2 show the commands for performing these tasks.

To prevent creation of LVCs from the Edge LSRs to LSCs, create an access list at the Edge LSRs that denies all 172.16.0.0/24 addresses. The configuration examples for Edge LSR 1 and 2 show the commands for performing this task.

Configuration for LSC 1

7200 LSC 1:

ip cef 
!
mpls request-labels for acl_lsc
ip access-list standard acl_lsc
deny   172.16.0.0 0.255.255.255
deny   192.168.0.0 0.255.255.255
permit any
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.16.0.1 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for BPX 1 and BPX 2

BPX 1 and BPX 2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3
cnfrsrc 1.3 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Note For the shelf controller, you must configure a VSI partition for the slave control port interface (addshelf 1.1, cnfrsrc 1.1...). However, do not configure an XTagATM port for the VSI partition (for instance, XTagATM11).


Configuration for LSC 2

7200 LSC 2:

ip cef 
!
mpls request-labels for acl_lsc
ip access-list standard acl_lsc
deny   172.16.0.0 0.255.255.255
deny   192.168.0.0 0.255.255.255
permit any
!
interface loopback0
ip address 172.16.0.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi 
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM22
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
ip unnumbered loopback0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip
!

Configuration for Edge LSR 1

LSR 1:

ip cef distributed 
!
mpls request-labels for acl_ler
ip access-list standard acl_ler
deny   172.16.0.0 0.255.255.255
permit any
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 192.168.0.1 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR 2

7200 LSR 2:

ip cef 
!
mpls request-labels for acl_ler
ip access-list standard acl_ler
deny   172.16.0.0 0.255.255.255
permit any
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 192.168.0.2 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.22 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls ip

Feature 4: Differentiated Services and MPLS QoS Multi-VCs

Quality of service (QoS) refers to the ability of a network to provide better service to selected network traffic over various underlying technologies including Frame Relay, ATM, Ethernet and 802.1 networks, SONET, and IP-routed networks. In particular, QoS features provide better and more predictable network service by supporting dedicated bandwidth, improving loss characteristics, avoiding and managing network congestion, shaping network traffic, and setting traffic priorities across the network.

A service model, also called a level of service, describes a set of end-to-end QoS capabilities. End-to-end QoS is the ability of the network to deliver service required by specific network traffic from one end of the network to another. Differentiated services is a service model supported by Cisco IOS QoS software that can provide end-to-end QoS.

The Multiprotocol Label Switching quality of service (MPLS QoS) mechanism is a feature for performing differentiated services over ATM. The MPLS QoS Multi-VC mode enhances general MPLS QoS features by enabling users to map the experimental (EXP) field value of an MPLS label to an ATM virtual circuit (VC) to create sets of labeled virtual circuits (LVCs). Each set consists of multiple LVCs, and each LVC is treated as a member of the set.

Differentiated Services and Quality of Service

Differentiated service (DiffServ) is a multiple service model that can satisfy differing QoS requirements. However, unlike the integrated service model, an application using differentiated service does not explicitly signal the router before sending data.

Two different acronyms are used for differentiated services and both are commonly used in other documents. "DiffServ" is used most commonly, and refers to differentiated services in general. "DS" is the name given specifically to the bits in the IP headers used by DiffServ.

For differentiated service, the network tries to deliver a particular kind of service based on the QoS specified by each packet. This specification can occur in different ways, for example, using the IP Precedence bit settings in IP packets. The network uses the QoS specification to classify, mark, shape, and police traffic, and to perform intelligent queuing.

The differentiated service model is used for several mission-critical applications and for providing end-to-end QoS. Typically, this service model is appropriate for aggregate flows because it performs a relatively coarse level of traffic classification.

Cisco IOS QoS includes the following features that support the differentiated service model:

Committed access rate (CAR), which performs packet classification through IP Precedence and QoS group settings. CAR performs metering and policing of traffic, providing bandwidth management.

Intelligent queuing schemes such as WRED and WFQ and their equivalent features on the Versatile Interface Processor (VIP), which are VIP-Distributed WRED and VIP-Distributed WFQ. These features can be used with CAR to deliver differentiated services.

The DiffServ approach to QoS divides network traffic into a small number of classes and allocates resources on a per-class basis. DiffServ can be viewed as an incremental approach to QoS.

DiffServ Per-Hop Behaviors

DiffServ networks use queuing technologies such as weighted fair queuing (WFQ) to provide differential service to the different classes of service (CoS). Link-by-link engineering of WFQ parameters is the approach suggested by the IETF DiffServ Working Group.

The treatment of a particular CoS on a particular link (or "hop"), using technologies such as weighted fair queuing, is referred to as a per-hop behavior (PHB). Cisco supports engineering of per-hop behaviors on links in both ATM MPLS and packet-based MPLS networks, as well as ordinary IP networks. The principles are the same in all network types, although there are differences in the way CoS information is carried in packets for different networks.

DiffServ Classes and Cisco IP+ATM Switches

Engineering of DiffServ networks leads to specifications of required bandwidths for various classes of service on various links of the network. This is quite different from traditional per-VC bandwidth management in ATM networks.

As shown in Figure 29, class-based queuing involves a separate queue in the ATM switch for each CoS. Cells from all LVCs of each CoS are queued in a single queue for that CoS. The bandwidth parameters of a CoS on a link are set directly on the CoS queue. The only parameter signalled for each LVC is the CoS for the LVC. This means that the ATM MPLS control component is used unchanged, except that multiple LVCs are set up for each destination: one LVC per destination per CoS.

Figure 29 Per-VC Service and CoS in Cisco IP + ATM Switches

Cisco IP+ATM switches support DiffServ for MPLS traffic, alongside ATM Forum Traffic Management types for PVCs and SVCs. Each DiffServ or ATM Forum Traffic Management type gets is own "class of service buffer." Per-VC queuing can be used in addition to the class of "class of service buffers" and this is done for ATM Forum Traffic Management types. Weighted fair queuing is used to assign bandwidths to the IP class of service buffers. This means that the IP classes share bandwidth.

Using class-based queuing instead of per-VC queuing for the IP traffic has several advantages:

The number of parameters programmed into the network is much smaller with class-based queuing: if a network has N nodes, the number of parameters required is proportional to N2 with per-VC queuing, but proportional to N with class-based queuing.

Class-based queuing is fairer, given approximate information. This is important because engineering of an IP network is based on estimates and models of customer traffic. With class-based queuing, premium-class traffic from any origin to any destination gets preferential access to a premium-class bandwidth left spare from other origin-destination pairs. This is much harder to achieve if bandwidths are assigned to individual origin-destination LVCs.

Class-based queuing can be used on any link types. Link types include those that do not support virtual circuits: PPP-over-SDH and WDM. Use of class-based queuing helps make a network flexible and open to future changes in technology without major changes in operations, administration, and management. Cisco already makes switch-routers with ATM, PPP-over-SDH, and WDM interfaces.

Class-based queuing works better with VC merge than per-VC queuing. Per-VC queuing negates the advantages of VC merge in improving signaling scale. If per-LVC queuing were used, each LVC in the tree of LVCs merging to a given destination would need a bandwidth assigned to it according to the sum of bandwidth requirements merging in from other branches. Any addition or change made to the bandwidths of the merging VCs would create a ripple of signaling through the network. This negates one of the important advantages of VC merge, namely that VC merge removes the requirement for end-to-end signaling for most LVCs.

Even if class-based queuing is used, changes to class-based bandwidths will be required as bandwidth requirements change. However these can be dealt with as a network provisioning issue on a time-frame of at least hours or days. Class-based queuing does not require the real-time QoS signaling overheads of per-VC queuing. Furthermore, the granularity of changes with class-based queuing is per-link; with per-VC queuing, the granularity is per-VC. This is another example of how class-based queuing is more scalable.

For these reasons, Cisco strongly recommends that networks supporting IP services are engineered using class-based queuing.

Requirements for Differential Services Approach to QoS

Good quality of service can be provided to connectionless IP traffic, on MPLS networks in particular. The process involves the following:

Enforcement of access contracts at the edge of a network using Cisco CAR

Using the access contracts as a basis for modeling traffic

Optional refinement of traffic models based on operation of a network

Setting of the links' queuing parameters according to the traffic models

Offering SLAs of an appropriate form and strength for a connectionless IP service

Service admission control

Configuring Multi-VCs

The Multiprotocol Label Switching quality of service (MPLS QoS) mechanism is a feature for performing differentiated services over ATM. It allows the ATM network to treat different packets based on the EXP (experimental) field (also called CoS) of the MPLS header which has the same properties, and which can be mapped to IP precedence. You can configure multiple VCs that have different QoS characteristics between any pair of ATM-connected routers.

Every label switch router (LSR) has a corresponding number of virtual circuits (VCs)—from one to four—for the same destination, hence the term "multi-VC." These parallel label virtual circuits (LVCs) are set up automatically by the upstream edge router using the Label Distribution Protocol. Each set consists of multiple LVCs, and each LVC is treated as a member of the set.

For more detailed information on configuring multi-VCs, refer to the following document:

MPLS QoS Multi-VC Mode for PA-A3

Setting Up LVCs

When you configure multi-VC support, four LVCs for each destination are created by default that map to MPLS QoS. Table 7 shows the LVC to MPLS QoS mapping.

Table 7 LVC to MPLS QoS Mapping

Label Virtual Circuit Type
Class of Service
IP Type of Service

Available

0

0,4

Standard

1

1,5

Premium

2

2,6

Control

3

3, 7


To set up four default LVCs (with default mapping), you add the following instruction to the ATM subinterface configuration of the Edge LSRs:

mpls atm multi-vc

The parallel LVCs are set up automatically on the ATM switches.

Optionally Setting the MPLS Experimental Field Value

The ability to optionally set the MPLS EXP field of the label header upon entry of a customer IP packet into an MPLS network has no direct connection to the MPLS QoS multi-VC mode feature per se. However, the ability to manipulate the EXP field provides flexibility to preserve the IP precedence value in the IP type-of-service (ToS) byte in the header of an incoming IP packet. The service provider can manage queues or select LVCs based on the value of the EXP field.

You can set the MPLS experimental field (EXP) value in customer IP packets arriving at the provider edge router by means of modular QoS CLI commands or CAR commands executed on that edge router.

Using Modular QoS CLI to Configure Ingress Label Switching Router

To use the modular QoS CLI to configure the ingress LSR appropriately for multi-VC mode functionality, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Configure a class map to classify IP packets according to their IP precedence.

Step 2 Configure a policy map to mark MPLS packets (that is, to write their classification into the MPLS EXP field).

Step 3 Configure the input interface of the ingress router to attach the service policy.


In the following example, all packets that contain IP precedence 4 are matched by the class-map name IP_prec4:

Router(config)# class-map IP_prec4 
Router(config-c-map)# match ip precedence 4 
Router(config-c-map)# end

In the following example, the MPLS EXP field of each IP packet that matches class-map IP_prec4 is set to a value of 5:

Router(config)# policy-map set_experimental_5 
Router(config-p-map)# class IP_prec4 
Router(config-p-map-c)# set mpls experimental 5 
Router(config-p-map-c)# end

In the following example, the service policy set_experimental_5 is attached to the specified Ethernet input interface (et 1/0/0):

Router(config)# interface et 1/0/0 
Router(config-if)# service-policy input set_experimental_5 
Router(config-if)# end

Using CAR to Configure an Ingress Label Switching Router

To classify the packets on the ingress Edge LSR, you can use MPLS QoS committed access rate (CAR) service to set the EXP field of the MPLS header to the desired value. To use CAR to configure the ingress LSR for multi-VC mode functionality, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Configure an IP rate-limit access list for classifying IP packets according to their IP precedence.

Step 2 Configure a rate-limit on an input interface to mark the MPLS packets (to write the packet's classification into the MPLS EXP field).


In the following example, all packets containing IP precedence value 4 are matched by the rate-limit access list 24:

Router(config)# access-list rate-limit 24 4 
Router(config)# end

In the following example, the MPLS EXP field is set to 4 on output of packets if input IP packets match the access-list and conform to the packet rate. The MPLS EXP field is set to 0 if packets match access list 24 and exceed the input rate.

Router(config)# interface et 1/0/0 
Router(config-if)# rate-limit input access-group rate-limit 24 8000 8000 8000 
conform-action set-mpls-exp-transmit 4 exceed-action set-mpls-exp-transmit 0 
Router(config-if)# end

Note You can also use the mpls atm vpi 2-4 command, but it is not mandatory to specify which virtual path identifiers (VPIs) will be used for MPLS.

You need to configure ip cef (ip cef distributed on a Cisco 7200) on the general configuration of the routers before you configure CAR.


Configuring MPLS QoS in the Core of an ATM Network

To configure MPLS QoS in the core of an ATM network, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Configure an ATM MPLS subinterface on the core router and enable multi-VC mode on that subinterface.

Step 2 Optionally, create an MPLS QoS map and associate that map with the core router.


The default for the multi-VC mode creates four LVCs (available, standard, premium, and control) for each MPLS destination.

If you do not choose to use the default for configuring LVCs, you can configure fewer LVCs by using the QoS map function.

Configuring Queuing Functions on Router Output Interfaces

To configure class-based weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ) and weighted random early detection (WRED) functionality on a Cisco 7200 series router interface or a Cisco MGX 8850 switch with the Cisco RPM-PR card interface, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Create a class map and associate it with an IP type of service to match on a packet.

Step 2 Create a policy map to match with the class map.

Step 3 Assign a CBWFQ to the policy map to act on the packet.

Step 4 Assign a WRED to the policy map to act on the packet.

Step 5 Specify an interface and assign the policy map on the interface.


Setting the ATM-CLP Bit on Enhanced ATM Port Adapter Interfaces

To set the ATM-CLP bit in ATM cells exiting from an enhanced ATM port adapter interface incorporated into a Cisco 7200 router or a Cisco MGX RPM-PR (in a Cisco MGX 8850 or 8890 switch), perform the following steps:


Step 1 Create a class map and associate it with an IP type of service to match on a packet.

Step 2 Create a policy map to match with the class map.

Step 3 Configure MPLS packets matching this class to have the CLP bit set in the outgoing ATM cells.

Step 4 Specify an interface and assign the policy map on the interface.


Verifying MPLS QoS Operation

To verify the operation of MPLS QoS, issue the following commands to view information about the switching interfaces, the specified QoS map used to assign a quantity of VCs, and the prefix map used to assign a QoS map to network prefixes that match a standard IP access list.

Router# show mpls interfaces interfaces
Router# show mpls cos-map cos-map
Router# show mpls prefix-map

Configuration Examples

This section provides examples for the following configurations, based on the sample ATM LSR network configuration shown in Figure 30:

Configuration for a customer edge router (CE1)

Configuration for LSC1

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

Configuration for LSC2

Configuration for Edge LSR1

Configuration for Edge LSR2


Note The IGX series ATM switches do not support class of service (CoS).


Figure 30 Sample ATM LSR Network Configuration (CE1 to be added with connection to Edge LSR1)

Configuration for CE1

2600 or 3600 CE1:

interface Loopback0
ip address 7.7.7.7 255.255.255.0
!
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 150.150.0.2 255.255.255.0
duplex auto
speed auto
!
router ospf 1
network 7.7.7.7 0.0.0.0 area 0
network 150.150.0.0 0.0.0.255 area 0

Configuration for Edge LSR1

8850 with RPM-PR LSR1:

ip cef distributed
!
class-map match-all exp0 
match mpls experimental 0 4 
class-map match-all exp1 
match mpls experimental 1 5 
class-map match-all exp2 
match mpls experimental 2 6 
class-map match-all exp3 
match mpls experimental 3 7 
class-map match-all acl101 
match access-group 101
class-map match-all acl102 
match access-group 102
!
policy-map atm_output 
class exp0 
bandwidth percent 10 
class exp1 
bandwidth percent 25 
class exp2 
bandwidth percent 20 
class exp3 
bandwidth percent 20 
! 
policy-map input_int
class acl101 
police cir 64000 bc 2000 conform-action set-mpls-exp-transmit 2 exceed-action 
set-mpls-exp-transmit 1 
class acl102 
police cir 32000 bc 1500 conform-action set-mpls-exp-transmit 3 exceed-action drop 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 142.6.132.2 255.255.255.255 
!
interface Ethernet1/1
ip address 150.150.0.1 255.255.255.0
service-policy input input_int 
!
interface ATM2/0/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0/0.5 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
service-policy output atm_output
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm multi-vc
mpls ip
!
access-list 101 permit ip host 7.7.7.7 any
access-list 102 permit ip host 150.150.0.2 any

Configuration for LSC1

7200 or 8850 with PRM-PR LSC1:

ip cef
!
interface loopback0
ip address 192.103.210.5 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
ip unnumbered loopback 0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls atm cos available 20
mpls atm cos standard 30
mpls atm cos premium 25
mpls atm cos control 25
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM23
ip unnumbered loopback 0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm cos available 20
mpls atm cos standard 30
mpls atm cos premium 25
mpls atm cos control 25
mpls ip

Configuration for BPX1 and BPX2

BPX1 and BPX2:

uptrk 1.1
addshelf 1.1 v 1 1
cnfrsrc 1.1 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 1.3
cnfrsrc 1.3 256 252207 y 1 e 512 6144 2 15 26000 100000
uptrk 2.2
cnfrsrc 2.2 256 252207 y 1 e 512 4096 2 5 26000 100000

Configuration for LSC2

7200 or 8850 with RPM-PR LSC2:

ip cef 
!
interface loopback0
ip address 142.2.143.22 255.255.255.255
!
interface ATM3/0 
no ip address
tag-control-protocol vsi
ip route-cache cef
!
interface XTagATM13
ip unnumbered loopback 0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 1.3
mpls atm vpi 2-15
mpls atm cos available 20
mpls atm cos standard 30
mpls atm cos premium 25
mpls atm cos control 25
mpls ip
!
interface XTagATM23
ip unnumbered loopback 0
extended-port ATM3/0 bpx 2.2
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm cos available 20
mpls atm cos standard 30
mpls atm cos premium 25
mpls atm cos control 25
mpls ip

Configuration for Edge LSR2

7200 or 8850 with RPM-PR LSR2:

ip cef 
!
class-map match-all exp0 
match mpls experimental 0 4 
class-map match-all exp1 
match mpls experimental 1 5 
class-map match-all exp2 
match mpls experimental 2 6 
class-map match-all exp3 
match mpls experimental 3 7 
class-map match-all acl101 
match access-group 101
class-map match-all acl102
match access-group 102
! 
policy-map atm_output 
class exp0 
bandwidth percent 10 
class exp1 
bandwidth percent 25 
class exp2 
bandwidth percent 20 
class exp3 
bandwidth percent 20 
! 
policy-map input_int 
class acl101 
police cir 64000 bc 2000 conform-action set-mpls-exp-transmit 2 exceed-action 
set-mpls-exp-transmit 1 
class acl102 
police cir 32000 bc 1500 conform-action set-mpls-exp-transmit 3 exceed-action drop 
!
interface loopback 0
ip address 142.2.142.2 255.255.255.255 
!
interface Ethernet1/1
ip address 160.160.0.1 255.255.255.0
service-policy input input_int 
!
interface ATM2/0
no ip address
!
interface ATM2/0.9 mpls
ip unnumbered loopback 0
service-policy output atm_output
mpls atm vpi 2-5
mpls atm multi-vc
mpls ip
! 
access-list 101 permit ip host 8.8.8.8 any
access-list 102 permit ip host 160.160.0.1 any 

Configuration for CE2

2600 or 3600 CE2:

interface Loopback0
ip address 8.8.8.8 255.255.255.0
!
interface FastEthernet0/1
ip address 160.160.0.1 255.255.255.0
duplex auto
speed auto
!
router ospf 1
network 8.8.8.8 0.0.0.0 area 0
network 160.160.0.0 0.0.0.255 area 0

QoS Support

If LSC1 supports QoS, but LSC2 does not, LSC1 makes VC requests for the following default classes:

Control = CoS3

Standard = CoS1

LSC2 ignores the call field in the request and allocates two UBR label VCs.

If LSR1 supports QoS, but LSR2 does not, LSR2 receives the request to create multiple label VCs, but by default, creates class 0 only (UBR).

Feature 5: MPLS VC Merge

The VC merge feature allows multiple incoming VCs to be merged into a single outgoing VC. This feature is only available on hardware that supports VC Merge functionality. See VC Merge Hardware and Software Requirements for more information. VC Merge helps scale MPLS networks, because it allocates only one VC to each destination on a link. Figure 31 shows how VC merge streamlines the flow of frames in a network.

Figure 31 How VC Merge Improves the Flow of Information

Feature Overview

VC merge maps several incoming labels to one single outgoing label. Cells from different virtual channel identifiers (VCIs) traveling to the same destination are transmitted to the same outgoing VC using multipoint-to-point connections.

VC merge allows the switch to transmit cells coming from different VCIs over the same outgoing VCI to the same destination. In other words, VC merge queues AAL5 frames in input buffers until the switch receives the last frame. Then the switch transmits the cells from that AAL5 frame before it sends any cells from other frames. VC merge requires the switch to provide buffering, but no more buffering than is required in IP networks. VC merge slightly delays the transfer of frames; however, VC merge is for IP traffic and not for traffic that requires speed. IP traffic tolerates delays better than other traffic on the ATM network.

In Figure 32, routers A and B send traffic to router C (prefix 171.69.0.0/16). The ATM switch in the middle is configured with a single outbound VCI 50, which is bound to prefix 171.69.0.0/16. Data that flows from routers A and B congregates in the ATM switch and shares the same outgoing VC. The ATM switch buffers the cells from VCIs 40 and 90 until it receives all the AAL5 frames. Then, the switch forwards the complete frame router C on VCI 50.

Figure 32 How VC Merge Works

VC merge is enabled by default. To disable VC merge, enter the no mpls ldp atm vc-merge command in global configuration mode.

VC Merge Benefits

The VC merge feature makes MPLS networks highly scalable. Without VC merge, an IGX 8400 network can scale to about 22-64 Edge LSRs. The VC merge feature can expand the number of Edge LSRs 2 to 10 times that amount.


Note This example is approximate. The following dependencies and assumptions change the scalability: port speed, number of ports used, enabling multi-VC QoS, reserving all LVCs for MPLS.


This sharing of labels reduces the total number of virtual circuits required for label switching. Without VC merge, each source-destination prefix pair consumes one label VC on each interface along the path. VC merge reduces the label space shortage by sharing labels for different flows with the same destination.

VC Merge Restrictions

This feature is only available on hardware that supports VC Merge functionality. See VC Merge Hardware and Software Requirements for more information.

If the LSC hardware does not support the VC merge feature, and you enter the mpls ldp atm vc-merge command, you receive a warning message. The LSC sets up point-to-point VCs.

VC merge is not supported on subinterfaces.

All switches in the same network must run the same versions of software and firmware.

When VC merge is disabled, all existing LVCs are cleared. New LVCs are created, but their format is point to point. Likewise, when VC merge goes from a disabled state to an enabled state, all LVCs are cleared. New LVCs are created with a multipoint-to-point format.

VC Merge Hardware and Software Requirements

You need the following hardware, software, and firmware to enable the VC merge feature.

Hardware:

Cisco IGX 8400 switches with a UXM-E card

Cisco BPX 8600 series switches with a BXM-E card

Cisco MGX 8850 switches with an AXSM or AXSM-E card

Cisco IGX and BPX Switch Software

Release 9.3.10 or higher

IOS Software

12.2(8)T or higher

Related VC Merge Docs

Designing MPLS for ATM: Dimensioning MPLS Label VC Space

Configuration

The VC merge feature is enabled by default on devices that support the feature. To disable the VC merge feature, use the no mpls ldp atm vc-merge command.

Feature 6: MPLS Diff-Serv-Aware Traffic Engineering over ATM

Multiprotocol Label Switching Traffic Engineering (MPLS TE) supports the Diff-Serv-aware over ATM feature. MPLS TE allows constraint-based routing of IP traffic. One of the constraints satisfied by constraint-based routing is the availability of required bandwidth over a selected path. Diff-Serv-aware Traffic Engineering (DS-TE) extends MPLS traffic engineering to enable you to perform constraint-based routing of "guaranteed" traffic, which satisfies a more restrictive bandwidth constraint than that satisfied by constraint-based routing for regular traffic. The more restrictive bandwidth is termed a sub-pool, while the regular TE tunnel bandwidth is called the global pool. (The sub-pool is a portion of the global pool.) Tunnels using the sub-pool bandwidth can be used in conjunction with MPLS quality of service (QoS) mechanisms to deliver guaranteed bandwidth services end-to-end across the network. The ability to satisfy a more restrictive bandwidth constraint translates into an ability to achieve higher QoS performance (in terms of delay, jitter, or loss) for the guaranteed traffic.

Guaranteed Bandwidth Service Configuration

You can configure two bandwidth pools for tunnel head-end, mid-point, and tail-end devices. (See MPLS Diff-Serv-aware Traffic Engineering (DS-TE) over ATM for configuration information.) Once these pools are configured, you can:

Use one pool, the sub-pool, for tunnels that carry traffic requiring strict bandwidth guarantees or delay guarantees.

Use the other pool, the global pool, for tunnels that carry traffic requiring only Differentiated Service.

Having a separate pool for traffic requiring strict guarantees allows you to limit the amount of such traffic admitted on any given link. Often, you can achieve strict QoS guarantees only if the amount of guaranteed traffic is limited to a portion of the total link bandwidth.

Having a separate pool for other traffic (best-effort or Diff-Serv traffic) allows you to have a separate limit for the amount of such traffic admitted on any given link. This is useful because it allows you to fill up links with best-effort or Diff-Serv traffic, thereby achieving a greater utilization of those links.

Providing Strict QoS Guarantees Using DS-TE Sub-pool Tunnels

A tunnel using sub-pool bandwidth can satisfy the stricter requirements if you do all of the following:

1. Select a queue—or in Diff-Serv terminology, select a PHB (per-hop behavior)—to be used exclusively by the strict guarantee traffic. Call this the "GB queue."

For delay/jitter guarantees, use the Diff-Serv Expedited Forwarding PHB (EF PHB). On the Cisco 7200 it is the "priority" queue. You must configure the bandwidth of the queue to be at least equal to the bandwidth of the sub-pool.

For bandwidth guarantees, use the Diff-Serv Assured Forwarding PHB (AF PHB). On the Cisco 7200 you use one of the existing class-based weighted fair queuing (CBWFQ) queues.

2. Ensure that the guaranteed traffic sent through the sub-pool tunnel is placed in the GB queue at the outbound interface of every tunnel hop, and that no other traffic is placed in this queue.

You do this by marking the traffic that enters the tunnel with a unique value in the mpls exp bits field, and steering only traffic with that marking into the GB queue.

3. Ensure that this GB queue is never oversubscribed; that is, no more traffic is sent into the sub-pool tunnel than the GB queue can handle.

You do this by rate-limiting the guaranteed traffic before it enters the sub-pool tunnel. The aggregate rate of all traffic entering the sub-pool tunnel should be less than or equal to the bandwidth capacity of the sub-pool tunnel. Excess traffic can be dropped (for delay/jitter guarantees) or can be marked differently for preferential discard (for bandwidth guarantees).

4. Ensure that the amount of traffic entering the GB queue is limited to an appropriate percentage of the total bandwidth of the corresponding outbound link. The exact percentage to use depends on several factors that can contribute to accumulated delay in your network: your QoS performance objective, the total number of tunnel hops, the amount of link fan-in along the tunnel path, burstiness of the input traffic, and so on.

You do this by setting the sub-pool bandwidth of each outbound link to the appropriate percentage of the total link bandwidth (that is, by adjusting the subpool kbps parameter of the ip rsvp bandwidth command).

Providing Differentiated Service Using DS-TE Global Pool Tunnels

You can configure a tunnel using global pool bandwidth to carry best-effort as well as several other classes of traffic. Traffic from each class can receive differentiated service if you do all of the following:

1. Select a separate queue (a distinct Diff-Serv PHB) for each traffic class. For example, if there are three classes (gold, silver, and bronze) there must be three queues (Diff-Serv AF2, AF3, and AF4).

2. Mark each class of traffic using a unique value in the MPLS experimental bits field (for example gold = 4, silver = 5, bronze = 6).

3. Ensure that packets marked as Gold are placed in the gold queue, Silver in the silver queue, and so on. The tunnel bandwidth is set based on the expected aggregate traffic across all classes of service.

To control the amount of Diff-Serv tunnel traffic you intend to support on a given link, adjust the size of the global pool on that link.

Providing Strict Guarantees and Differentiated Service in the Same Network

Because DS-TE allows simultaneous constraint-based routing of sub-pool and global pool tunnels, strict guarantees and Diff-Serv can be supported simultaneously in a given network.

For More Information about MPLS Diff-Serv-aware over ATM

For more information on the MPLS Diff-Serv-aware over ATM feature and its configuration, see the following document:

MPLS Diff-Serv-aware Traffic Engineering (DS-TE) over ATM

Feature 7: MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

This feature allows you to use ATM OAM cells to detect a failure between cell-mode MPLS interfaces. If two Cisco routers are connected using an LC-ATM link or a logical link (VP tunnel interface), OAM cells are inserted at regular intervals and looped back on the remote end. When one side of the link goes down or if the logical link fails, the OAM cells cannot reach their destination, causing the interface to change to the down state. OAM management allows the status of LC-ATM interfaces to be identified. Using OAM management reduces the amount of time required to accurately reflect the status of the link.

Without OAM management, when one side of an LC-ATM link breaks, the other side of the link cannot detect the failure. The interface and the line protocol of the broken link are still in the up state.

You can configure the OAM management parameters and tune them to your network needs.

OAM management is enabled by default. If one Cisco router does not have same release of software (and thus does not have OAM management), the other router that has OAM management can detect the broken link.

This feature allows you to configure OAM management on the following types of interfaces:

MPLS subinterfaces (interface atmx/x.x mpls)

Switch subinterfaces on route processor modules (RPMs) (interface switch 1.x mpls)

Extended tag-switching interfaces on label switch controllers (interface xtagatmxx)

Prerequisites for MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

This feature has the following prerequisites:

The device must support cell mode MPLS LC-ATM interfaces.

Restrictions for MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

This feature has the following restrictions:

This feature works with ATM port adapters that support OAM cells.

The control virtual circuit (VC) information is not displayed in the saved configuration if you use the default control VC and default LC-ATM OAM parameters

If the control VC is not set to the default VPI or VCI values or any of the OAM parameters are not set to the default values, the control VC information is displayed in the saved configuration.

How to Configure MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM


Note If you use the default control VC and do not want to change the OAM defaults, you do not need to configure the interface for OAM management.


This procedure explains how to configure OAM management on the interface. You can also use this procedure to configure OAM management on an MPLS ATM or switch subinterface.

SUMMARY STEPS

1. enable

2. configure terminal

3. interface xtagatm{if-number}

4. mpls atm control-vc vpi vci

5. oam-pvc manage [seconds]

6. oam retry [up-count down-count retry-frequency]

DETAILED STEPS

 
Command or Action
Purpose

Step 1 

enable

Example:

Router> enable

Enables privileged EXEC mode.

Enter your password if prompted.

Step 2 

configure terminal

Example:

Router# configure terminal

Enters global configuration mode.

Step 3 

interface xtagatm{if-number}

Example:

Router(config)# interface xtagatm61

Specifies the XtagATM interface.

Step 4 

mpls atm control-vc vpi vci

Example:

Router(config-subif)# mpls atm control-vc 0 32

Configures the control VC VPI and VCI values for the link to the MPLS peer.

This command also enables you to enter control-VC configuration mode.

Step 5 

oam-pvc manage [seconds]

Example:
Router(cfg-mpls-atm-cvc)# oam-pvc manage 25

(Optional) Specifies how often OAM cells should be sent. See the oam-pvc command for the default values.

Step 6 

oam retry [up-count down-count retry-frequency]

Example:
Router(cfg-mpls-atm-cvc)# oam retry 2 3 4

(Optional) Specifies the OAM retry count before declaring a VC is up or down, and its polling frequency. See the oam retry command for the default values.

Troubleshooting Tips

Use the following commands to help troubleshoot:

show atm vc detail

debug atm oam

Configuration Examples for MPLS: OAM Insertion and Loop Detection on LC-ATM

This section provides the following configuration examples:

OAM Management with MPLS Subinterfaces Example

OAM Management with Switch Subinterfaces on Route Processor Modules Example

OAM Management with XtagATM Subinterfaces on Label Switch Controllers Example

OAM Management with MPLS Subinterfaces Example

The following example show how to configure OAM management on an MPLS subinterface.

interface ATM3/0.100 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0
mpls atm control-vc 0 32
oam-pvc manage 1
mpls ip

OAM Management with Switch Subinterfaces on Route Processor Modules Example

The following example shows how to configure OAM management on a switch subinterface on an route processor module.

interface Switch1.10 mpls
ip unnumbered Loopback0
mpls atm control-vc 0 32
oam retry 1 5 1
oam-pvc manage 2
mpls ip

OAM Management with XtagATM Subinterfaces on Label Switch Controllers Example

The following example shows how to configure OAM management on an XtagATM subinterface.

interface xtagatm113
ip unnumbered Loopback0
extended-port Switch1 descriptor "11:1.3:3"
mpls atm control-vc 0 32
oam retry 1 5 1
mpls ip 

Feature 8: Troubleshooting the MPLS LSC Network with the LVC Path Trace Feature

This section describes the LVC Path Trace feature, which enables you to display the path of an established LVC. The show mpls atm-ldp bindings command has been updated with the path keyword. By displaying the path of an LVC, it is easier to troubleshoot outages in an MPLS LSC network.

Prerequisites for the LVC Path Trace Feature

Before issuing the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command with the path keyword, ensure that LDP loop detection is enabled throughout the LC-ATM network. The LDP loop detection mechanism is used with the Downstream on Demand (DoD) method of label distribution, supplementing the DoD hop count mechanism to detect looping label switched paths (LSPs) that might occur during transient routing events. You enable LDP loop detection with the mpls ldp loop-detection global configuration command.

If LDP loop detection is not enabled, the following error message is displayed when you issue the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command with the path keyword:

%Cannot trace the path of LVCs, because LDP loop detection is not enabled for this LDP 
session

Ensure that LDP loop detection is configured before LDP sessions are configured. Issuing the mpls ldp loop-detection command on already existing LDP sessions has no effect. The following error message is displayed:

%Enabling loop detection has no effect on existing LDP sessions. 

To determine if loop detection is enabled on DoD LDP sessions, you can issue the show mpls ldp neighbor detail command. In the following example, the last two lines of output show that LDP loop detection is on and the path vector limit of the LDP session is 20/20. (The path vector limit is configured with the mpls ldp maxhops command.)

Router# show mpls ldp neighbor detail

Peer LDP Ident: 10.0.3.42:1; Local LDP Ident 10.0.2.102:1        
TCP connection: 10.0.3.42.11028 - 10.0.2.102.646        
State: Oper; Msgs sent/rcvd: 46/46; Downstream on demand        
Up time: 00:33:38; UID: 1; Peer Id 0;        
LDP discovery sources:          
Switch1.1; Src IP addr: 10.0.3.42            
holdtime: 15000 ms, hello interval: 5000 ms        
Peer holdtime: 180000 ms; KA interval: 60000 ms; Peer state: estab        
Clients: TC ATM        
Loop Detection Peer/Local: on/on        
Path vector Limit Peer/Local: 20/20

Restriction for the LVC Path Trace Feature

The LVC Path Trace feature cannot completely trace the path of an LVC if VC merge capability is enabled. If VC Merge is enabled on some nodes, show mpls atm-ldp bindings command with the path keyword displays the path only up to the merging point.

Tracing the Path of an LVC

When you issue the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command with the path keyword, the command displays the path of the LVC, from the source to its destination. The asterisk (*) next to the prefix indicates the address from where the command was issued. The path output is limited to four router IDs per line. If more than four routers exist in the path, the command output wraps to the next line. For more information about the command output, see the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command with the path keyword. The following example is a sample LVC path trace:

Router# show mpls atm-ldp bindings 10.0.2.115 32 path

 Destination: 10.0.2.115/32
    Headend Router Switch1.1 (2 hops) 0/39  Active, VCD=9, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.2.102*     10.0.3.42       10.0.2.115	
    Headend Router Switch1.1 (2 hops) 0/41  Active, VCD=8, CoS=premium
       Path:    10.0.2.102*     10.0.3.42       10.0.2.115
    Headend Router Switch1.1 (2 hops) 0/43  Active, VCD=7, CoS=control
       Path:    10.0.2.102*     10.0.3.42       10.0.2.115

The path is always displayed from headend to tailend. If you display the path of a transit node, the prefix with the asterisk appears in the middle of the output. If you display the path of a tailend device, the prefix with the asterisk is at the end.

The following example shows the path of a transit node:

Destination: 10.0.0.13/32
    Headend Switch XTagATM1301 (1 hop) 0/87  Active, VCD=604, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM4010202 0/3538 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/417 Active, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.0.2        10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM4010202 0/3594 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/477 Active, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.0.11       10.0.0.2        10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM10010202 0/2042 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/523 Active, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.0.100      10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM4010505 1/262 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/717 Active, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.0.72       10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM4010505 1/264 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/719 Active, CoS=standard
       Path:    10.0.0.72       10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM4010505 1/266 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/721 Active, CoS=premium
       Path:    10.0.0.72       10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 
    Transit XTagATM4010505 1/268 Active -> XTagATM1301 0/723 Active, CoS=control
       Path:    10.0.0.72       10.0.0.10*      10.0.0.13 

The following example shows the path of a tailend device:

Destination: 10.0.2.142/32
    Tailend Router Switch1.1 0/5464 Active, VCD=10432, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.2.112      10.0.3.25       10.0.2.142*
    Tailend Router Switch1.1 0/5466 Active, VCD=10433, CoS=premium
       Path:    10.0.2.112      10.0.3.25       10.0.2.142*
    Tailend Router Switch1.1 0/5468 Active, VCD=10434, CoS=control
       Path:    10.0.2.112      10.0.3.25       10.0.2.142*
    Tailend Router Switch1.1 0/8110 Active, VCD=11759, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.2.92       10.0.3.42       10.0.3.25       10.0.2.142*
    Tailend Router Switch1.1 0/8112 Active, VCD=11760, CoS=premium
       Path:    10.0.2.92       10.0.3.42       10.0.3.25       10.0.2.142*
    Tailend Router Switch1.1 0/8114 Active, VCD=11761, CoS=control
       Path:    10.0.2.92       10.0.3.42       10.0.3.25       10.0.2.142*

Starting Up the Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 and Cisco MGX AXSM

The Cisco MGX 8850 AXSM Broadband ATM Switching Module is a high-density, high-speed module used in the Cisco MGX 8850 combined with the high-capacity PXM-45 processor switching module to deliver connectivity from T3/E3 to OC-48c/STM-16.

This section contains the following topics:

Before Startup

Copying the Images from the TFTP Server

Upgrading the PXM-45 and AXSM Images

Verifying the IOS Files on the PXM-45 E:Drive

Before Startup

This section contains information about the following:

Access Privileges

Booting Order and Cautions

File and Directory Names Are Case Sensitive

Flash Command vs. Bootflash Command

Upgrade Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 Card First

Set Boot IP Address in Every Switch

Image File Formats

Access Privileges

The default username and password for access to the switch is cisco. In this mode, a limited set of commands are available for troubleshooting. If you log in during stage 1 and the card progresses to the "active" or "standby" state, the card logs out the stage 1 user and prompts you to log in again. At this point, you must log in as a user with configuration privileges and the corresponding password. The stage 1 username and password are not supported on active and standby cards.

To perform some startup procedures, you need to log in as a user with SUPER_GP privileges (default username and password: superuser, superuser).

To display detailed command lists, you must establish a session using a username with SERVICE_GP privileges or higher.

For more information on access privileges on the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, see the Cisco MGX 8850 Routing Switch Command Reference, Release 2.1.

Booting Order and Cautions

Make sure that you boot the Cisco 8850 PXM-45 Processor Switch Module properly with the correct PXM image. If the PXM-45 is not fully booted properly, you cannot reach any cards in the Cisco 8850 MGX switch. With a proper boot, you should get the "unknown.7.PXM.a>" prompt, or if you have already given the card a name, you should get a "name.7.PXM.a>" prompt. With either prompt, you can reach other cards.

The PXM-45 needs to be booted before you bring up the Cisco MGX 8850 RPM-PRs. Make sure that all RPM-PRs are booted properly with the correct image. Otherwise, the PXM does not recognize the RPM-PRs.

File and Directory Names Are Case Sensitive

You must use a capital E when referencing the E: drive in switch commands. File and directory names in the switch file system are case sensitive.

Flash Command vs. Bootflash Command

Although you can display directory contents with the dir bootflash: command, the show flash: command provides more detail. The terms bootflash and flash refer to the same entity on the RPM-PR; on other Cisco routers, bootflash and flash are separate entities.

Upgrade Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 Card First

Pay attention to the following if you plan to upgrade PXM-45 and AXSM cards:

Upgrade the PXM-45 cards first. Wait until the PXM-45 cards are operating in active and standby modes with the correct software before upgrading AXSM cards.

The software version used by the PXM-45/B cards should be equal to or later than the version used on the AXSM, AXSM/B, and AXSM-E cards.

Upgrade the AXSM boot software before you upgrade the run-time software.

If you are upgrading software on more than one AXSM card in the switch at the same time, wait until one AXSM card upgrade is complete before starting the upgrade on another AXSM card.

Set Boot IP Address in Every Switch

Because the LAN IP address is stored on the PXM-45 hard disk and is not used until after the run-time software loads, Cisco recommends that the boot IP address be set in every switch. This enables switch management over Ethernet when the boot software has loaded.

Image File Formats

Figure 33 illustrates the filename format for released software.

Figure 33 Filename Format for Release Software

Figure 34 illustrates the filename format for prereleased firmware.

Figure 34 Filename Format for Prereleased Software

Copying the Images from the TFTP Server

To copy the software images for the Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 and Cisco MGX 8850 AXSM from the TFTP server to the Cisco MGX 8850 switch, perform the following steps:


Step 1 On the PXM-45, set the node name for the switch using the cnfname command:

unknown.7.PXM.a > cnfname <node name>

Enter up to 32 characters for the node name. The Cisco MGX 8850 switch node name is case sensitive. Be sure to enter the name correctly. For example:

unknown.7.PXM.a > cnfname Switch

This node name will be changed to Switch. Please Confirm
cnfname: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y
cnfname: Configured this node name to Switch Successfully.
SWITCH.7.PXM.a >

The new node name appears immediately in the next CLI prompt.

Step 2 Verify the IP address of the Ethernet interface before you copy the image files from the TFTP server. Use the dspipif interface display command.


Note Make sure that you have a network connection from the PXM-45 card before trying to copy the image files.


For example:

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > dspipif lnPci0
SWITCH             System Rev: 02.01 Sep. 13, 2001 16:19:43 GMT
MGX8850               Node Alarm: MAJOR
IP INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
lnPci (unit number 0):
Flags: (0x63) UP BROADCAST ARP RUNNING 
Internet address: 10.0.6.105
Broadcast address: 0.255.255.255
Netmask 0xff000000 Subnetmask 0xffff0000
Ethernet address is 00:01:42:26:5f:b2
Metric is 0
Maximum Transfer Unit size is 1500
20 packets received; 0 packets sent
0 input errors; 0 output errors
0 collisions
DISK IP address: 10.0.6.105
SWITCH.7.PXM.a >

If the IP address is not configured, then you can configure the IP address, using the following command:

ipifconfig <interface> [ <ip_address> ] [ netmask <mask> ] [ broadcast <broad_addr> ]
[ up | down ] [arp | noarp] [svc | nosvc] [pvc | nopvc]
[ default | nodefault] [clrstats]

Where:

<interface> = the interface name—use dspipif to see valid values, for example, atm0, lnPci0, sl0

<ip_address> = IP address for interface—<ip_address> has format a.b.c.d, for example, 172.29.21.96

netmask <mask> = interface network mask—netmask is a keyword and <mask> has a format of a.b.c.d, for example, 255.255.0.0

broadcast <broad_addr> = interface broadcast address—broadcast is a keyword and <broad_addr> has a format of a.b.c.d, for example, 172.29.255.255

For example:

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > ipifconfig lnPci0 10.0.6.105 netmask 255.255.0.0 up

You can verify the IP address of the Ethernet interface, using the dspipif lnPci0 command.

Step 3 Save the existing configuration with the saveallcnf command. This command saves the configuration to a file in the C:/CNF directory. The file is named using the switch name and the current date as follows: Name_01_DateTime.zip.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > saveallcnf
The 'saveallcnf' command can be time-consuming. The shelf
must not provision new circuits while this command is running. 

Do not run this command unless the shelf configuration is stable
or you risk corrupting the saved configuration file. 

Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y
saveallcnf: shelf configuration saved in C:/CNF/Switch_01_200109151550.zip.

Caution Avoid making configuration changes while upgrading PXM-45 software. Configuration changes can be lost when the PXM45 is reset during the upgrade.

Step 4 Go to the directory where the images are located, /tftpboot/mpls/atm_mpls/MGX/pxm_axsm_images, and identify the PXM and AXSM images to be loaded in the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.

Workstation> ls

002.001.060.008-P2.tar          pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_bt
002.001.060.008-P2.tar.txt      pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw
2.01.60.8-P2.catcs              pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_bt.hex
CWM_UPGRD                       pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_bt.map
axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt       pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_ses
axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.fw    pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_ses.fw
axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.hex   pxm1_001.001.060.008-P1_ses.map
axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.map   pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt
axsm_002.001.060.008-P2         pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw
axsm_002.001.060.008-P2.fw      pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.hex
axsm_002.001.060.008-P2.map     pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.map
axsme_002.001.060.008-A_bt      pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx
axsme_002.001.060.008-A_bt.fw   pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx.fw
axsme_002.001.060.008-A_bt.hex  pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx.map
axsme_002.001.060.008-A_bt.map  release.notes
axsme_002.001.060.008-P1        rpm-boot-mz.122-3.4.T
axsme_002.001.060.008-P1.fw     rpm-js-mz.122-3.4.T
axsme_002.001.060.008-P1.map

Step 5 Copy the PXM-45 and the AXSM images from the TFTP server to the C:/FW directory on the Cisco MGX 8850 switch using the ftp <destination-address> command.


Note You cannot start the FTP process from the Cisco MGX 8850 switch.


Workstation> ftp 10.0.6.105
Connected to 10.0.6.105.
220 VxWorks FTP server (VxWorks 5.3.1) ready.
Name (10.0.6.105:username): cisco
331 Password required
Password:
230 User logged in
ftp> bin
200 Type set to I, binary mode
ftp> cd FW
250 Changed directory to "C:FW"
ftp> put pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw
200 Port set okay
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Transfer complete
local: pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw remote: pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw
897616 bytes sent in 9.2 seconds (96 Kbytes/s)
Hash mark printing on (8192 bytes/hash mark).
ftp> put pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx.fw
200 Port set okay
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Transfer complete
local: pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx.fw remote: pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx.fw
4889196 bytes sent in 49 seconds (97 Kbytes/s)
ftp> put axsm_002.001.060.008-P2.fw
200 Port set okay
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Transfer complete
local: axsm_002.001.060.008-P2.fw remote: axsm_002.001.060.008-P2.fw
2651752 bytes sent in 27 seconds (97 Kbytes/s)
ftp> put axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.fw
200 Port set okay
150 Opening BINARY mode data connection
226 Transfer complete
local: axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.fw remote: axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.fw
634528 bytes sent in 6.5 seconds (96 Kbytes/s)
ftp> bye
221 Bye...see you later
Workstation>

Step 6 Verify that the PXM-45 and AXSM images are in the C:/FW directory on the Cisco MGX 8850 switch. Your current directory is C. You first need to change the directory to C:/FW using the cd command.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > cd FW

Then, you can list the files on this directory using the ls or dir command.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > ls
.
..
pxm45_002.000.002.000_mgx.fw
pxm45_002.000.002.000_bt.fw
axsm_002.000.002.000.fw
axsm_002.000.002.000_bt.fw
pxm45_002.001.000.235-A_bt.fw
rpm-boot-mz_002.001.000.040
rpm-js-mz_002.001.000.040
axsm_002.001.000.040-A.fw
axsm_002.001.000.210-A_bt.fw
pxm45_002.001.000.040-P1_mgx.fw
pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw
pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_mgx.fw
axsm_002.001.060.008-P2.fw
axsm_002.001.060.008-A_bt.fw
In the file system : 
total space : 819200 K bytes
free space : 755677 K bytes

The files copied from the server are highlighted in the example.



Note For more details on these procedures, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 switch documentation for the current release.


Upgrading the PXM-45 and AXSM Images

To upgrade the software images for the Cisco MGX 8850 PXM-45 and Cisco MGX 8850 AXSM cards, perform the following steps:


Step 1 Change to the C directory on the PXM-45 card.


Note You need to be in the C directory to perform an upgrade on either a PXM-45 or AXSM card.


SWITCH.7.PXM.a > cd ..
SWITCH.7.PXM.a > sh

Wait until the display is complete before continuing to the next step.

Step 2 Enter the sysBackupBoot command. At the pxm45bkup> prompt burn the boot software on the PXM-45 using the sysFlashBootBurn filename command. Replace filename with the complete path to the boot file on the PXM-45 hard drive.

pxm45>sysBackupBoot
pxm45bkup> sysFlashBootBurn "C:FW/pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw"
Burning backup boot from file=C:FW/pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw
Please confirm:[y/n y
ImgHdr: image_type=2,shelf_type=5,card_type=3000
Checksum size is 897616 ... 
Simulating PXM Card removal.
Downloading C:FW/pxm45_002.001.060.008-P1_bt.fw into the flash ... 
QUERY TABLE: flash_size=8388608 block_size=131072 write_buf_size=32
    buf_wr_time=2048 write_time=2048 erase_time=16384000
 burning 0xbfc00000 verify ... ok
 burning 0xbfc20000 verify ... ok
 burning 0xbfc40000 verify ... ok
 burning 0xbfc60000 verify ... ok
 burning 0xbfc80000 verify ... ok
 burning 0xbfca0000 verify ... ok
 burning 0xbfcc0000 verify ... ok
Verify checksum: addr=0xbfc00000 chksum=0x91ce90e3 size=(0xdb250,897616)...ok
Flash download completed ... 
value = 0 = 0x0
pxm45bkup>reboot
Login: Entering rvtAct...
BertCtcAppEventHandler
Attaching network interface sl0... done.
Login: Cisco
password:

Step 3 Verify that the boot software is on the PXM-45 hard drive using the dspcd slot command:

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > dspcd 7
SWITCH                 System Rev: 02.01 Sep. 13, 2001 16:48:18 GMT
MGX8850                    Node Alarm: MAJOR
Slot Number 7 Redundant Slot: 8
Front Card      Upper Card       Lower Card
               ----------      ----------       ----------
Inserted Card: PXM45           UI Stratum3      PXM HardDiskDrive 
Reserved Card: PXM45           UI Stratum3      PXM HardDiskDrive 
State:         Active-U        Active           Active 
Serial Number: SBK0447009D     SBK044200XM      SBK043600GV 
Prim SW Rev:   2.1(0.40)P1     ---              ---
Sec SW Rev:    2.1(0.40)P1     ---              ---
Cur SW Rev:    2.1(0.40)P1     ---              ---
Boot FW Rev:   2.1(60.8)P1     ---              ---
800-level Rev: B0              A0               A0 
800-level Part#: 800-06147-07  800-05787-02     800-05052-04
CLEI Code:     BAA5KMZCAA      BA7IBCLAAA       BA7IADNAAA 
Reset Reason: On Power up
Card Alarm: NONE 
Failed Reason: None 
Miscellaneous Information:
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop: q

The new boot firmware is highlighted in the example.

Step 4 Load the image in the PXM-45 in slot using the loadrev slot revision command.


Note Loading the upgrade run-time software version on a PXM-45 or AXSM card uses the same loadrev slot revision command.


SWITCH.7.PXM.a > loadrev 7 2.1(60.8)P1
one or more card(s) in the logical slot may be reset.
loadrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y

Step 5 Verify that the image was loaded into slot 7 in the PXM-45 using the dspcd slot command.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > dspcd 7
SWITCH                System Rev: 02.01 Sep. 13, 2001 18:24:20 GMT
MGX8850                     Node Alarm: MAJOR
Slot Number 7 Redundant Slot: 8

               Front Card      Upper Card       Lower Card
               ----------      ----------       ----------
Inserted Card: PXM45           UI Stratum3      PXM HardDiskDrive 
Reserved Card: PXM45           UI Stratum3      PXM HardDiskDrive 
State:         Active-U        Active           Active 
Serial Number: SBK0447009D     SBK044200XM      SBK043600GV 
Prim SW Rev:   2.1(0.40)P1     ---              ---
Sec SW Rev:    2.1(60.8)P1   ---              ---
Cur SW Rev:    2.1(0.40)P1     ---              ---
Boot FW Rev:   2.1(60.8)P1   ---              ---
800-level Rev:   B0            A0               A0 
800-level Part#: 800-06147-07  800-05787-02     800-05052-04
CLEI Code:       BAA5KMZCAA    BA7IBCLAAA       BA7IADNAAA 
Reset Reason: On Power up
Card Alarm: NONE 
Failed Reason: None 
Miscellaneous Information:
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop: q

The new firmware and software images are highlighted in this example.

Step 6 Start the new run-time software version on a PXM-45 (or on an AXSM card), by entering the runrev slot revision command.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > runrev 7 2.1(60.8)P1
one or more card(s) in the logical slot may be reset.
runrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y

Step 7 Enter the burnboot slot revision command to burn the boot software on the standby AXSM card. You need to specify the slot number of the standby card, in this case slot 11.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > burnboot 11 2.1(60.8)A
The card in slot 11 will be reset.
burnboot: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y

Step 8 Load the image in the AXSM in slot 11 using the loadrev slot revision command. Then start using the new run-time software version by entering the runrev slot revision command.

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > loadrev 11 2.1(60.8)A 
one or more card(s) in the logical slot may be reset.
loadrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > runrev 11 2.1(60.8)P2
one or more card(s) in the logical slot may be reset.
runrev: Do you want to proceed (Yes/No)? y

The card goes through many states, but should settle in the Active-U state.

Step 9 Verify that the AXSM image loaded properly using the dspcd slot command.


Note If you have multiple AXSM or other cards, make sure you have loaded the image properly on all the cards. Use the dspcd slot command to verify the image status.


SWITCH.7.PXM.a > dspcd 11
SWITCH                System Rev: 02.01 Sep. 13, 2001 18:40:26 GMT
MGX8850                     Node Alarm: MAJOR
Slot Number: 11 Redundant Slot: NONE 
                Front Card        Upper Card        Lower Card
                ----------        ----------        ----------
Inserted Card:  AXSM_16OC3        MMF_8_OC3_MT      --- 
Reserved Card:  UnReserved        UnReserved        UnReserved 
State:        Active-U          Active            Empty 
Serial Number:  SBK044200H5       SBK044301MQ       --- 
Prim SW Rev:    2.1(60.8)P2       ---               ---
Sec SW Rev:     ---               ---               ---
Cur SW Rev:     2.1(60.8)P2       ---               ---
Boot FW Rev:    2.1(60.8)A        ---               ---
800-level Rev:                                      --- 
800-level Part#: 800-05776-06     800-04819-01      --- 
CLEI Code:       BAA5HLXCAA       BAA5Z8UCAA        --- 
Reset Reason:    On Power up
Card Alarm:      NONE 
Failed Reason:   None 
Miscellaneous Information:
Type <CR> to continue, Q<CR> to stop: 
Switch             System Rev: 02.01 Sep. 13, 2001 18:40:26 GMT
MGX8850                 Node Alarm: MAJOR
Crossbar Slot Status: Present
Alarm Causes
------------
NO ALARMS 



Note For more details on these procedures, refer to the Cisco MGX 8850 switch documentation for the current release.


Verifying the IOS Files on the PXM-45 E:Drive

The IOS image can be stored on the PXM-45 hard drive. To confirm this, make sure you are in the E:RPM directory and enter the ll command to list the contents of the directory. You should see a file named rpm-js-mz_002.001.000.057, or with a similar name beginning with rpm-js-mz, which is the IOS image.


Tip Copy the RPM-PR Cisco IOS image into the RPM directory of the PXM-45 hard disk with the filename specified in the RPM-PR boot command.


The following screen displays the PXM E:RPM content listing:

SWITCH.7.PXM.a > cd E:RPM
SWITCH.7.PXM.a > 

size          date       time       name
--------       ------     ------    --------
     512    FEB-23-2001  17:59:54   .                 <DIR>
     512    FEB-23-2001  17:59:54   ..                <DIR>
 2452288    FEB-23-2001  11:13:10   rpm-boot-mz_002.001.000.057  
 7934768    FEB-23-2001  11:15:24   rpm-js-mz_002.001.000.057  
     744    FEB-27-2001  10:24:22   auto_config_slot11  
In the file system : 
    total space :  102400 K bytes
    free  space :  91984 K bytes

Command Reference

This section describes the CLI commands that you can use with the MPLS LSC. All other commands used with this feature are documented in the Cisco IOS Release 12.3 command reference publications.

Modified Commands for Cisco IOS Release 12.3(9):

oam-pvc

oam retry

Modified Commands for Cisco IOS Release 12.3(9)

show mpls atm-ldp bindings

Commands Related to MPLS LSC

debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

debug mpls xtagatm errors

debug mpls xtagatm events

debug mpls xtagatm vc

debug vsi api

debug vsi errors

debug vsi events

debug vsi packets

debug vsi param-groups

extended-port

interface xtagatm

mpls atm control-vc

mpls atm cos

mpls atm disable-headend-vc

mpls ldp atm vc-merge

mpls atm vpi

mpls atm vp-tunnel

mpls request-labels for

oam-pvc

oam retry

show controllers vsi control-interface

show controllers vsi descriptor

show controllers vsi session

show controllers vsi status

show controllers vsi traffic

show controllers xtagatm

show interface xtagatm

show mpls atm-ldp bindings

show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

show mpls atm-ldp capability

show mpls atm-ldp summary

show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm

show xtagatm cross-connect

show xtagatm vc

tag-control-protocol vsi

All other commands used with this feature are documented in the command reference publications.

Command Conventions

boldface font

Commands and keywords are in boldface type.

italic font

Arguments for which you supply values are in italics. In a context that does not allow italics, arguments are enclosed in angle brackets < >.

[ ]

Elements in square brackets are optional.

{ x | y | z }

Alternative keywords are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars.

[ x | y | z ]

Optional keywords are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars.


CLI Command Summary

Table 8 summarizes the MPLS commands that evolved from existing tag-switching commands.

Table 8 Summary of MPLS Commands That Changed from Tag-Switching Commands 

MPLS Command
Old Tag-Switching Command
Description

interface xtagatm

interface xtagatm

Creates an XtagATM interface and enters the interface configuration mode, which allows you to enter commands to configure the interface.

mpls atm control-vc

tag-switching atm control-vc

Configures the use of the VSI on a particular master control port.

mpls atm cos

tag-switching atm cos

Changes the value of configured bandwidth allocation for CoS.

mpls atm disable-headend-vc

tag-switching atm disable-headend-vc

Removes all headend VCs from the MPLS LSC and disable its ability to function as an Edge LSR.

mpls atm vpi

tag-switching atm vpi

Configures the range of values to use in the VPI field for label VCs.

mpls atm vp-tunnel

tag-switching atm vp-tunnel

Specifies an interface or a subinterface as a VP tunnel.

mpls request-labels for

tag-switching request-tags for

Restricts the creation of LVCs through the use of access lists on the LSC or label edge router.

Show Commands

show controllers xtagatm

show controllers XTagATM

Displays information about an extended MPLS ATM interface controlled through the VSI protocol. (If an interface is not specified, this command displays information about all extended MPLS ATM interfaces controlled through the VSI protocol.)

show interface xtagatm

show interface XTagATM

Displays information about an extended MPLS ATM interface.

show mpls atm-ldp bindings

show tag-switching atm-tdp bindings

Displays the requested entries from the ATM LDP label bindings database.

show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

show tag-switching atm-tdp bindwait

Displays the number of bindings waiting for label assignments from a remote MPLS ATM switch.

show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm

show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm

Displays information about CoS bandwidth allocation on extended MPLS ATM interfaces.

show xtagatm cross-connect

show xtagatm cross-connect

Displays information about the LSC view of the cross-connect table on the remotely controlled ATM switch.

show xtagatm vc

show xtagatm vc

Displays information about terminating VCs on extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interfaces.

Debug Commands

debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

debug tag-switching xtagatm cross-connect

Displays requests and responses for establishing and removing cross-connects on a controlled ATM switch.

debug mpls xtagatm errors

debug tag-switching xtagatm errors

Displays information about errors and abnormal conditions that occur on XtagATM interfaces.

debug mpls xtagatm events

debug tag-switching xtagatm events

Displays information about major events on XtagATM interfaces, except for VCs and cross-connects.

debug mpls xtagatm vc

debug tag-switching xtagatm vc

Displays information about events that affect XtagATM terminating VCs.


debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

To display requests and responses for establishing and removing cross-connects on the controlled ATM switch, use the debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

no debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

This command monitors requests to establish or remove cross-connects from XtagATM interfaces to the VSI master, as well as the VSI master's responses to these requests.


Note Use this command with care, because it generates output for each cross-connect operation performed by the LSC. In a network configuration with many label virtual circuits (LVCs), the volume of output generated can interfere with system timing and the proper operation of other router functions. Use this command only in situations in which the LVC setup or teardown rate is low.


Examples

The following is sample output from the debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect command:

Router# debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect

XTagATM: cross-conn request; SETUP, userdata 0x17, userbits 0x1, prec 7
        0xC0100 (Ctl-If) 1/32 <-> 0xC0200 (XTagATM0) 0/32
XTagATM: cross-conn response; DOWN, userdata 0x60CDCB5C, userbits 0x2, result 
OK
        0xC0200 1/37 --> 0xC0300 1/37

Table 9 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 9 debug mpls xtagatm cross-connect Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
XTagATM

The source of the debug message as an XtagATM interface.

cross-conn

An indicator that the debug message pertains to a cross-connect setup or teardown operation.

request 

A request from an XtagATM interface to the VSI master to set up or tear down a cross-connect.

response

Response from the VSI master to an XtagATM interface that a cross-connect was set up or removed.

SETUP

A request for the setup of a cross-connect.

TEARDOWN 

A request for the teardown of a cross-connect.

UP

The cross-connect is established.

DOWN

The cross-connect is not established.

userdata, userbits

Values passed with the request that are returned in the corresponding fields in the matching response.

prec 

The precedence for the cross-connect.

result

The status of the completed request.

0xC0100 (Ctl-If) 1/32

Information about the interface:

One endpoint of the cross-connect is on the interface whose logical interface number is 0xC0100.

The interface is the VSI control interface.

The VPI value at this endpoint is 1.

The VCI value at this end of the cross-connect is 32.

<->

The type of cross-connect (unidirectional or bidirectional).

0xC0200 (XTagATM0) 
0/32

Information about the interface:

The other endpoint of the cross-connect is on the interface whose logical interface number is 0xC0200.

The interface is associated with XtagATM interface 0.

The VPI value at this endpoint is 0.

The VCI value at this end of the cross-connect is 32.

->

The response pertains to a unidirectional cross-connect.


Related Commands

Command
Description

show xtagatm cross-connect

Displays information about remotely connected ATM switches.


debug mpls xtagatm errors

To display information about error and abnormal conditions that occur on extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interfaces, use the debug mpls xtagatm errors command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug mpls xtagatm errors

no debug mpls xtagatm errors

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

Use the debug mpls xtagatm errors command to display information about abnormal conditions and events that occur on XtagATM interfaces.

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug mpls xtagatm errors command:

Router# debug mpls xtagatm errors

XTagATM VC: XTagATM0 1707 2/352 (ATM1/0 1769 3/915): Cross-connect setup 
failed NO_RESOURCES

This message indicates a failed attempt to set up a cross-connect for a terminating VC on XtagATM0. The reason for the failure was a lack of resources on the controlled ATM switch.

debug mpls xtagatm events

To display information about major events that occur on extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interfaces, not including events for specific XtagATM VCs and switch cross-connects, use the debug mpls xtagatm events command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug mpls xtagatm events

no debug mpls xtagatm events

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Command
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

Use the debug mpls xtagatm events command to monitor major events that occur on XtagATM interfaces. This command monitors events that pertain only to XtagATM interfaces as a whole and does not include any events that pertain to individual XtagATM VCs or individual switch cross-connects. The specific events that are monitored when the debug mpls xtagatm events command is in effect include the following:

Receiving asynchronous notifications that the VSI master sent through the external ATM API (ExATM API) to an XtagATM interface.

Resizing of the table that is used to store switch cross-connect information. This table is resized automatically as the number of cross-connects increases.

Marking of XtagATM VCs as stale when an XtagATM interface shuts down, thereby ensuring that the stale interfaces are refreshed before new XtagATM VCs can be created on the interface.

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug mpls xtagatm events command:

Router# debug mpls xtagatm events

XTagATM: desired cross-connect table size set to 256
XTagATM: ExATM API intf event Up, port 0xA0100 (None)
XTagATM: ExATM API intf event Down, port 0xA0100 (None)
XTagATM: marking all VCs stale on XTagATM0

Table 10 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 10 debug mpls xtagatm events Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
XTagATM 

The source of the debug message.

desired cross-connect 
table size set to 256

The table of cross-connect information has been set to hold 256 entries. A single cross-connect table is shared among all XtagATM interfaces. The cross-connect table is automatically resized as the number of cross-connects increases.

ExATM API

The information in the debug output pertains to an asynchronous notification sent by the VSI master to the XtagATM driver.

event Up/Down 

The specific event that was sent by the VSI master to the XtagATM driver.

port 0xA0100 (None)

The event pertains to the VSI interface whose logical interface number is 0xA0100, and that this logical interface is not bound to an XtagATM interface.

marking all VCs stale 
on XTagATM0

All existing XtagATM VCs on interface XtagATM0 are marked as stale, and that XtagATM0 remains down until all of these VCs are refreshed.


debug mpls xtagatm vc

To display information about events that affect individual extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) terminating VCs, use the debug mpls xtagatm vc command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug mpls xtagatm vc

no debug mpls xtagatm vc

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

Use the debug mpls xtagatm vc command to display detailed information about all events that affect individual XtagATM terminating VCs.


Note Use this command with care, because it results in extensive output when many XtagATM VCs are set up or torn down. This output can interfere with system timing and normal operation of other router functions. Use the debug mpls xtagatm vc command only when a few XtagATM VCs are created or removed.


Examples

The following is sample output from the debug mpls xtagatm vc command:

Router# debug mpls xtagatm vc

XTagATM VC: XTagATM1 18 0/32 (ATM1/0 0 0/0):  Setup,  Down --> UpPend 
XTagATM VC: XTagATM1 18 0/32 (ATM1/0 88 1/32):  Complete,  UpPend --> Up 
XTagATM VC: XTagATM1 19 1/33 (ATM1/0 0 0/0):  Setup,  Down --> UpPend 
XTagATM VC: XTagATM0 43 0/32 (ATM1/0 67 1/84):  Teardown,  Up --> DownPend 

Table 11 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 11 debug mpls xtagatm vc Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
XTagATM VC

The source of the debug message.

XTagATM <ifnum>

The particular XtagATM interface number for the terminating VC.

vcd vpi/vci

The VCD and VPI/VCI values for the terminating VC.

(ctl-if vcd vpi/vci)

The control interface, the VCD, and the VPI and VCI values for the private VC corresponding to the XtagATM VC on the control interface.

Setup, Complete, 
Teardown

The name of the event that occurred for the indicated VC.

oldstate -> newstate

The state of the terminating VC before and after the processing of the event.


debug vsi api

To display information on events associated with the external ATM API interface to the VSI master, use the debug vsi api command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug vsi api

no debug vsi api

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

Use the debug vsi api command to monitor the communication between the VSI master and the XtagATM component regarding interface changes and cross-connect requests.

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug vsi api command:

Router# debug vsi api

VSI_M: vsi_exatm_conn_req: 0x000C0200/1/35 -> 0x000C0100/1/50
       desired state up, status OK
VSI_M: vsi_exatm_conn_resp: 0x000C0200/1/33 -> 0x000C0100/1/49
       curr state up, status OK

Table 12 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 12 debug vsi api Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
vsi_exatm_conn_req

The type of connection request (connect or disconnect) that was submitted to the VSI master.

0x000C0200

The logical interface identifier of the primary endpoint, in hexadecimal form.

1/35

VPI and VCI of the primary endpoint.

-> 

The type of traffic flow. A right arrow (->) indicates that the expected traffic flow is unidirectional (from the primary endpoint to the secondary endpoint). A bidirectional arrow (<->) indicates bidirectional traffic flow.

0x000C0100

Logical interface identifier of the secondary endpoint.

1/50

VPI and VCI of the secondary endpoint.

desired state

The status of a connect request. Up indicates a connect request; Down indicates a disconnect request.

status (in 
vsi_exatm_conn_req 
output)

The status of a request. One of following status indications appears:

OK
INVALID_ARGS
NONEXIST_INTF
TIMEOUT
NO_RESOURCES
FAIL

OK means only that the request is successfully queued for transmission to the switch; it does not indicate completion of the request.


debug vsi errors

To display information about errors encountered by the VSI master, use the debug vsi errors command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug vsi errors [interface interface [slave number]]

no debug vsi errors [interface interface [slave number]]

Syntax Description

interface interface

The interface number.

slave number

The slave number (beginning with 0).


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

Use the debug vsi errors command to display information about errors encountered by the VSI master when parsing received messages, as well as information about unexpected conditions encountered by the VSI master.

If the interface parameter is specified, output is restricted to errors associated with the indicated VSI control interface. If the slave number is specified, output is further restricted to errors associated with the session with the indicated slave.


Note Slave numbers are the same as the session numbers discussed under the show controllers vsi session command.


Multiple commands that specify slave numbers allow multiple slaves to be debugged immediately. For example, the following commands display errors associated with sessions 0 and 1 on control interface atm2/0, but for no other sessions.

Router# debug vsi errors interface atm2/0 slave 0
Router# debug vsi errors interface atm2/0 slave 1

Some errors are not associated with any particular control interface or session. Messages associated with these errors are printed, regardless of the interface or slave options currently in effect.

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug vsi errors command:

Router# debug vsi errors

VSI Master: parse error (unexpected param-group contents) in GEN ERROR RSP rcvd on 
ATM2/0:0/51 (slave 0)
            errored section is at offset 16, for 2 bytes:
 01.01.00.a0 00.00.00.00 00.12.00.38 00.10.00.34 
*00.01*00.69 00.2c.00.00 01.01.00.80 00.00.00.08 
 00.00.00.00 00.00.00.00 00.00.00.00 0f.a2.00.0a 
 00.01.00.00 00.00.00.00 00.00.00.00 00.00.00.00 
 00.00.00.00 

Table 13 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 13 debug vsi errors Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
parse error

An error was encountered during the parsing of a message received by the VSI master.

unexpected 
param-group contents

The type of parsing error. In this case, a parameter group within the message contained invalid data.

GEN ERROR RSP

The function code in the header of the error message.

ATM2/0

The control interface on which the error message was received.

0/51

VPI or VCI of the VC (on the control interface) on which the error message is received.

slave

Number of the session on which the error message is received.

offset <n>

The number of bytes between the start of the VSI header and the start of that portion of the message in error.

<n> bytes

Length of the error section.

00.01.00.a0 [...]

The entire error message, as a series of hexadecimal bytes. Note that the error section is between asterisks (*).


debug vsi events

To display information about events that affect entire sessions, as well as events that affect only individual connections, use the debug vsi events command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug vsi events [interface interface [slave number]]

no debug vsi events [interface interface [slave number]]

Syntax Description

interface interface

The interface number.

slave number

The slave number (beginning with zero).


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

Use the debug vsi events command to display information about events associated with the per-session state machines of the VSI master, as well as the per-connection state machines. If you specify an interface, the output is restricted to events associated with the indicated VSI control interface. If you specify the slave number, output is further restricted to events associated with the session with the indicated slave.


Note Slave numbers are the same as the session numbers discussed under the show controllers vsi session command.


Multiple commands that specify slave numbers allow multiple slaves to be debugged at once. For example, the following commands restrict output to events associated with sessions 0 and 1 on control interface atm2/0, but for no other sessions. Output associated with all per-connection events are displayed, regardless of the interface or slave options currently in effect.

Router# debug vsi events interface atm2/0 slave 0
Router# debug vsi events interface atm2/0 slave 1

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug vsi events command:

Router# debug vsi events

VSI Master: conn 0xC0200/1/37->0xC0100/1/51: 
            CONNECTING -> UP
VSI Master(session 0 on ATM2/0): 
    event CONN_CMT_RSP, state ESTABLISHED -> ESTABLISHED
VSI Master(session 0 on ATM2/0): 
    event KEEPALIVE_TIMEOUT, state ESTABLISHED -> ESTABLISHED
VSI Master(session 0 on ATM2/0): 
    event SW_GET_CNFG_RSP, state ESTABLISHED -> ESTABLISHED
debug vsi packets

Table 14 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 14 debug vsi events Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
conn

The event applies to a particular connection.

0xC0200

Logical interface identifier of the primary endpoint, in hexadecimal form.

1/37

VPI or VCI of the primary endpoint.

->

The type of traffic flow. A right arrow (->) indicates unidirectional traffic flow (from the primary endpoint to the secondary endpoint). A bidirectional arrow <-> indicates bidirectional traffic flow.

0xC0100

Logical interface identifier of the secondary endpoint.

1/51

VPI or VCI of the secondary endpoint.

<state1> -> <state2>

<state1> is a mnemonic for the state of the connection before the event occurred.

<state2> represents the state of the connection after the event occurred.

session

The number of the session with which the event is associated.

ATM2/0

The control interface associated with the session.

event

The event that has occurred. This includes mnemonics for the function codes of received messages (for example, CONN_CMT_RSP), as well as mnemonics for other events (for example, KEEPALIVE_TIMEOUT).

state <state1> -> 
<state2>

Mnemonics for the session states associated with the transition triggered by the event. <state1> is a mnemonic for the state of the session before the event occurred; <state2> is a mnemonic for the state of the session after the event occurred.


debug vsi packets

To display a one-line summary of each VSI message sent and received by the label switch controller (LSC), use the debug vsi packets command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command

debug vsi packets [interface interface [slave number]]

no debug vsi packets [interface interface [slave number]]

Syntax Description

interface interface

The interface number.

slave number

The slave number (beginning with zero).


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

If you specify an interface, output is restricted to messages sent and received on the indicated VSI control interface. If you specify a slave number, output is further restricted to messages sent and received on the session with the indicated slave.


Note Slave numbers are the same as the session numbers discussed under the show controllers vsi session command.


Multiple commands that specify slave numbers allow multiple slaves to be debugged at once. For example, the following commands restrict output to messages received on atm2/0 for sessions 0 and 1, but for no other sessions.

Router# debug vsi packets interface atm2/0 slave 0
Router# debug vsi packets interface atm2/0 slave 1

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug vsi packets command:

Router# debug vsi packets

VSI master(session 0 on ATM2/0): sent msg SW GET CNFG CMD on 0/51
VSI master(session 0 on ATM2/0): rcvd msg SW GET CNFG RSP on 0/51
VSI master(session 0 on ATM2/0): sent msg SW GET CNFG CMD on 0/51
VSI master(session 0 on ATM2/0): rcvd msg SW GET CNFG RSP on 0/51

Table 15 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 15 debug vsi packets Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
session

Session number identifying a particular VSI slave. Numbers begin with zero. See the show controllers vsi session command.

ATM2/0

Identifier for the control interface on which the message is sent or received.

sent

The message is sent by the VSI master.

rcvd

The message is received by the VSI master.

msg

The function code from the message header.

0/51

VPI or VCI of the VC (on the control interface) on which the message is sent or received.


debug vsi param-groups

To display the first 128 bytes of each VSI message sent and received by the MPLS LSC (in hexadecimal form), use the debug vsi param-groups command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug vsi param-groups [interface interface [slave number]]

no debug vsi param-groups [interface interface [slave number]]


Note param-groups stands for parameter groups. A parameter group is a component of a VSI message.


Syntax Description

interface interface

The interface number.

slave number

The slave number (beginning with zero).


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

This command is most commonly used with the debug vsi packets command to monitor incoming and outgoing VSI messages.

If you specify an interface, output is restricted to messages sent and received on the indicated VSI control interface.

If you specify a slave, output is further restricted to messages sent and received on the session with the indicated slave.


Note Slave numbers are the same as the session numbers discussed under the show controllers vsi session command.


Multiple commands that specify a slave numbers allows multiple slaves to be debugged at once. For example, the following commands restrict output for messages received on atm2/0 for sessions 0 and 1, but for no other sessions.

Router# debug vsi param-groups interface atm2/0 slave 0 
Router# debug vsi param-groups interface atm2/0 slave 1

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug vsi param-groups command:

Router# debug vsi param-groups

Outgoing VSI msg of 12 bytes (not including encap):
 01.02.00.80 00.00.95.c2 00.00.00.00 
Incoming VSI msg of 72 bytes (not including encap):
 01.02.00.81 00.00.95.c2 00.0f.00.3c 00.10.00.08 
 00.01.00.00 00.00.00.00 01.00.00.08 00.00.00.09 
 00.00.00.09 01.10.00.20 01.01.01.00 0c.08.80.00 
 00.01.0f.a0 00.13.00.15 00.0c.01.00 00.00.00.00 
 42.50.58.2d 56.53.49.31 
Outgoing VSI msg of 12 bytes (not including encap):
 01.02.00.80 00.00.95.c3 00.00.00.00 
Incoming VSI msg of 72 bytes (not including encap):
 01.02.00.81 00.00.95.c3 00.0f.00.3c 00.10.00.08 
 00.01.00.00 00.00.00.00 01.00.00.08 00.00.00.09 
 00.00.00.09 01.10.00.20 01.01.01.00 0c.08.80.00 
 00.01.0f.a0 00.13.00.15 00.0c.01.00 00.00.00.00 
 42.50.58.2d 56.53.49.31 

Table 16 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 16 debug vsi param-groups Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
Outgoing

The message is sent by the VSI master.

Incoming

The message is received by the VSI master.

bytes

Number of bytes in the message, starting at the VSI header, and excluding the link layer encapsulation.

01.02...

The first 128 bytes of the message, in hexadecimal form.


extended-port

To associate an extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interface with an external interface on the remotely controlled ATM switch, use the extended-port command in interface configuration mode. To remove the association, use the no form of this command.

extended-port ctrl-if {bpx bpx-port-number | igx igx-port-number | descriptor vsi-descriptor | vsi vsi-port-number}

no extended-port ctrl-if {bpx bpx-port-number | igx igx-port-number | descriptor vsi-descriptor | vsi vsi-port-number}

Syntax Description

ctrl-if

The XtagATM interface used to control the remote ATM switch. You must configure VSI on this interface using the tag-control-protocol vsi command.

bpx bpx-port-number

The associated Cisco BPX switch interface. To specify the interface, use the native BPX syntax.

slot.port [.virtual port]

You can only use this form of the command with a Cisco BPX switch.

igx igx-port-number

The associated Cisco IGX switch interface. To specify the interfaces, use the native BPX syntax.

slot.port [.virtual port]

You can only use this form of the command with a Cisco IGX switch.

descriptor vsi-descriptor

The VSI physical descriptor of the associated port.

The vsi-descriptor string must exactly match the corresponding VSI physical descriptor.

vsi vsi-port-number

VSI logical interface number (hex) of the associated port.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(3)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

The extended-port interface configuration command associates an XtagATM interface with an external interface on the remotely controlled ATM switch. The three alternate forms of the command permit the external interface on the controlled ATM switch to be specified in three different ways.

Examples

The following examples create an XtagATM interface, using different command qualifiers.

The following example creates an XtagATM interface and binds it to BPX switch port 2.3:

Router(config)# interface xtagatm23
Router(config-if)# extended-port atm0/0 bpx 2.3

The following example creates an XtagATM interface and binds it to port 2.4:

Router(config)# interface xtagatm24
Router(config-if)# extended-port atm0/0 descriptor 0.2.4.0

The following example creates an XtagATM interface and binds it to port 1622:

Router(config)# interface xtagatm1622
Router(config-if)# extended-port atm0/0 vsi 0x00010614

Related Commands

Command
Description

interface xtagatm

Creates an XtagATM interface.

show controllers vsi status

Displays a summary of each VSI-controlled interface.


interface xtagatm

To create an extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interface, use the interface xtagatm command in global configuration mode. The interface is created the first time this command is issued for a particular interface number. To disable the XtagATM interface, use the no form of this command.

interface xtagatm if-num

no interface xtagatm if-num

Syntax Description

if-num

The interface number.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

XtagATM interfaces are virtual interfaces that are created on reference-like tunnel interfaces. XtagATM interfaces are similar to ATM interfaces, except that the former only supports LC-ATM encapsulation.

Examples

In the following example, an XtagATM interface is created with interface number 62:

Router(config)# interface xtagatm62 

Related Commands

Command
Description

debug mpls xtagatm vc

Associates the currently selected extended XTagATM interface with a remotely controlled switch.


mpls atm control-vc

To configure the control virtual circuit (VC) virtual path identifier (VPI) and virtual circuit identifier (VCI) values for the initial link to the MPLS peer, use the mpls atm control-vc command in interface configuration mode. Use this command to establish the LDP session and to carry non-IP traffic. To return the VPI and VCI to their default value, use the no form of this command.

mpls atm control-vc vpi vci

no mpls atm control-vc vpi vci

Syntax Description

vpi

Virtual path identifier, in the range from 0 to 4095.

vci

Virtual circuit identifier, in the range from 0 to 65535.


Defaults

0/32

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.
The VPI range of values was extended to 4095.


Usage Guidelines

The default VPI VCI for the control VC is (3, 32). If you need a different control VC, use the mpls atm control-vc command to configure a VPI VCI allowed by the vpi vci arguments for the control VC.

Examples

The following example creates an MPLS subinterface on a router and selects VPI 1 and VCI 34 as the control VC.

Router(config)# interface atm4/0.1 mpls
Router(config-if)# mpls ip
Router(config-if)# mpls atm control-vc 1 34

Related Commands

Command
Description

mpls ip (interface)

Enables label switching of IPv4 packets on an interface.


mpls atm cos

To change the configured bandwidth allocation for class of service (CoS), use the mpls atm cos command in xtagatm interface configuration mode.

mpls atm cos {available | standard | premium | control} weight

Syntax Description

available

The weight for the available class. This is the lowest class priority.

standard

The weight for the standard class. This is the next lowest class priority.

premium

The weight for the premium class. This is the next highest class priority.

control

The weight for the control class. This is the highest class priority.

weight

The total weight for all CoS traffic classes. This value ranges from 0 to 100.


Defaults

Available 50%, control 50%

Command Modes

xtagatm interface configuration

Command History

Release
Modifications

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Examples

In the following example, the XtagATM interface is configured for CoS traffic.

Router(config)# interface Xtagatm12 
Router(config-if)# extended-port atm1/0 descriptor 1.2
Router(config-if)# mpls ip
Router(config-if)# mpls atm cos available 49
Router(config-if)# mpls atm cos standard 50
Router(config-if)# mpls atm cos premium 0
Router(config-if)# mpls atm cos control 1

mpls atm disable-headend-vc

To remove all headend virtual circuit (VCs) from the MPLS label switch controller (LSC) and disable its ability to function as an Edge LSR, use the mpls atm disable-headend-vc command in global configuration mode. To restore the headend VCs of the MPLS LSC and restores full Edge LSR functionality, use the no form of the command.

mpls atm disable-headend-vc

no mpls atm disable-headend-vc

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(7)DC

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

This command prevents the LSC from initiating headend LVCs, and thus reduces the number of LVCs used in the network.

Examples

In the following example, the MPLS LSC is disabled from acting like an Edge LSR and therefore cannot create headend LVCs.

Router(config)# mpls atm disable-headend-vc

mpls ldp atm vc-merge

To enable the virtual circuit (VC) merge (multipoint to point VCs) feature for unicast label VCs, use the mpls ldp atm vc-merge command in global configuration mode. To disable the VC merge capability, use the no form of this command.

mpls ldp atm vc-merge

no mpls ldp atm vc-merge

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

If the hardware supports ATM VC merge capabilities, this command is enabled by default; otherwise, the feature is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

11.1CT

This command was introduced.

12.2(8)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

By default VC merge is enabled. Therefore it is not necessary to use this command to initialize the feature. However, if you disable the VC merge feature, you can use this command to enable it.

Use of VC merge helps conserve ATM labels by allowing incoming LSPs from different sources for the same destination to be merged onto a single outgoing VC.

Examples

In the following example, the ATM-VC merge capability is disabled:

Router# no mpls ldp atm vc-merge

Related Commands

Command
Description

show mpls atm-ldp capability

Displays the ATM MPLS capabilities negotiated with LDP neighbors for LC-ATM interfaces.

show mpls atm-ldp bindings vc-merged

Verifies the VC merged connections.


mpls atm vpi

To configure the range of values to use in the virtual path identifier (VPI) field for label virtual circuits (VCs), use the mpls atm vpi command in interface configuration mode. To clear the range of values, use the no form of this command.

mpls atm vpi vpi [- vpi] [vci-range low - high]

no mpls atm vpi vpi [- vpi] [vci-range low - high]

Syntax Description

vpi

Virtual path identifier, low end of range (0 to 4095).

- vpi

(Optional) Virtual path identifier, high end of range (0 to 4095).

vci-range low - high

(Optional) Range of VCI values the subinterface can use for the VPI(s).


Defaults

The default VPI range is 1 to 1.

The default VCI range is 33 to 65535.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.
The vci-range keyword was added.
The VPI range of values was extended to 4095.


Usage Guidelines

You might need to change the default label VPI range on the switch if:

It is an administrative policy to use a VPI value other than 1, the default VPI.

There are many LVCs on an interface.

To configure ATM MPLS on a router interface (for example, an ATM Interface Processor), you must enable an MPLS subinterface.


Note The mpls atm control-vc and mpls atm vpi subinterface level configuration commands are available on any interface that can support ATM labeling.


Use this command to select an alternate range of VPI values for ATM label assignment on this interface. The two ends of the link negotiate a range defined by the intersection of the range configured at each end.

To configure the VPI range for an edge label switch router (Edge LSR) subinterface connected to another router or to an LSC, limit the range to four VPIs.

For an ATM-LSR, the VPI range specified must lie within the range that was configured on the ATM switch for the corresponding ATM switch interface.

If the LDP neighbor is a router, the VPI range can be no larger than two. For example, you can specify from 5 to 6 (a range of two), not 5 to 7 (a range of three). If the LDP neighbor is a switch, the maximum VPI range is 0 to 255.

If you use the vci-range keyword, you must specify a VPI value.

Examples

The following example creates a subinterface and selects a VPI range from VPI 1 to VPI 3:

Router(config)# interface atm4/0.1 mpls
Router(config-if)# mpls ip
Router(config-if)# mpls atm vpi 1-3

The following example creates a subinterface with a VPI of 240 and a VCI range between 33 and 4090:

Router(config)# interface atm4/0.1 mpls
Router(config-if)# mpls ip
Router(config-if)# mpls atm vpi 240 vci-range 33-4090

Related Commands

Command
Description

mpls atm control-vc

Configures VPI and VCI values for the initial link to an MPLS peer.


mpls atm vp-tunnel

To specify an interface or a subinterface as a VP tunnel, use the mpls atm vp-tunnel command in interface configuration mode. To remove the VP tunnel from an interface or subinterface, use the no form of this command.

mpls atm vp-tunnel vpi [vci-range low - high]

no mpls atm vp-tunnel vpi [vci-range low - high]

Syntax Description

vpi

The VPI value for the local end of the tunnel (0 to 4095).

vci-range low - high

Range of VCI values the VP tunnel can use.


Defaults

If you do not specify a VCI range for the VP tunnel, the tunnel uses the default VCI range of 33 to 65535.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.
The vci-range keyword was added.
The VPI range of values was extended to 4095.


Usage Guidelines

The mpls atm vp-tunnel and mpls atm vpi commands are mutually exclusive.

This command is available on both extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interfaces and on LC-ATM subinterfaces of router ATM interfaces. The command is not available on the LS1010, where all subinterfaces are automatically VP tunnels.

It is not necessary to use the mpls atm vp-tunnel command on an XtagATM interface in most applications. The switch learns (through VSI interface discovery) whether the XtagATM interface is a tunnel, the VPI value of the tunnel, and tunnel status.

Examples

The following example creates an MPLS subinterface VP tunnel with a VPI value of 4:

Router(config-if)# mpls atm vp-tunnel 4

The following example creates a VP tunnel with a value of 240 and a VCI range of 33 to 4090:

Router(config-if)# mpls atm vp-tunnel 240 vci-range 33-4090

mpls request-labels for

To restrict the creation of label virtual circuits (LVCs) through the use of access lists on the label switch controller (LSC) or label edge router, use the mpls request-labels for command in global configuration mode. To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.

mpls request-labels for access list

no mpls request-labels for

Syntax Description

access list

A named or numbered standard IP access list.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.1(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

The command includes the following usage guidelines:

You can specify either an access list number or name.

When you create an access list, the end of the access list contains an implicit deny statement for everything if it did not find a match before reaching the end.

If you omit the mask from an IP host address access list specification, 0.0.0.0 is assumed to be the mask.

Examples

In the following example, headend LVCs are prevented from being established from the LSC to all 192.168.x.x destinations. The following commands are added to the LSC configuration:

Router(config)# mpls request-labels for 1
Router(config)# access-list 1 deny 192.168.0.0 0.255.255.255
Router(config)# access-list 1 permit any

Related Commands

Command
Description

access list

Creates access lists.

ip access-list

Permits or denies access to IP addresses.


oam-pvc

To enable end-to-end F5 Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) loopback cell generation and OAM management for an ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC), virtual circuit (VC) class, or control VC, use the oam-pvc command in the appropriate command mode. To disable generation of OAM loopback cells and OAM management, use the no form of this command.

For an ATM VC or VC class:

oam-pvc [manage] [frequency]

no oam-pvc [manage] [frequency]

For an LC-ATM VC:

oam-pvc manage [frequency]

no oam-pvc manage [frequency]

Syntax Description

manage

(Optional for ATM VCs or VC classes; required for LC-ATM VCs)

Enables OAM management.

frequency

(Optional) Time delay between transmitting OAM loopback cells.

For ATM VCs or VC classes, the range of values is 0 to 600 seconds. The default is 10 seconds.

For LC-ATM VCs, the range of values is 0 to 255 seconds. The default is 5 seconds.


Defaults

For ATM VCS or VC Classes:

10 seconds

For control VCs

OAM is enabled by default. The default frequency is 5 seconds.

Command Modes

Interface-ATM-VC configuration (for an ATM PVC)

VC-class configuration (for a VC class)

PVC-in-range configuration (for an individual PVC within a PVC range)

Control-VC configuration (for enabling OAM management on an LC-ATM VC)

Command History

Release
Modification

11.3

This command was introduced.

12.1(5)T

This command was made available in PVC-in-range configuration mode.

12.3(2)T

This command was made available for LC-ATM VCs.

12.3(9)

This command was integrated into 12.3(9).


Usage Guidelines

If OAM management is enabled, further control of OAM management is configured using the oam retry command.

For ATM VCS or VC Classes:

If the oam-pvc command is not explicitly configured on an ATM PVC, the PVC inherits the following default configuration (listed in order of precedence):

Configuration of the oam-pvc command in a VC class assigned to the PVC itself.

Configuration of the oam-pvc command in a VC class assigned to the PVC's ATM subinterface.

Configuration of the oam-pvc command in a VC class assigned to the PVC's ATM main interface.

Global default: End-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell generation and OAM management are disabled, but if OAM cells are received, they are looped back. The default value for the frequency argument is 10 seconds.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell transmission and OAM management on an ATM PVC with a transmission frequency of 3 seconds:

Router(cfg-mpls-atm-cvc)# oam-pvc manage 3

The following example shows how to enable end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell transmission and OAM management on an LC-ATM interface with a transmission frequency of 2 seconds:

Router(config)# interface Switch1.10 mpls
Router(config-subif)# ip unnumbered Loopback0
Router(config-subif)# mpls atm control-vc 0 32
Router(cfg-mpls-atm-cvc)# oam-pvc manage 2

Related Commands

Command
Description

oam retry

Configures parameters related to OAM management for an ATM PVC, SVC, VC class or LC-ATM VC.


oam retry

To configure parameters related to Operation, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) management for an ATM permanent virtual circuit (PVC), switched virtual circuit (SVC), VC class, or VC bundle, or control VC, use the oam retry command in the appropriate command mode. To remove OAM management parameters, use the no form of this command.

oam retry up-count down-count retry-frequency

no oam retry

Syntax Description

up-count

Number of consecutive end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell responses that must be received in order to change a connection state to up. This argument does not apply to SVCs.

down-count

Number of consecutive end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell responses that are not received in order to change the state to down or tear down an SVC connection.

retry-frequency

The frequency (in seconds) that end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cells are transmitted when a change in the up/down state is being verified. For example, if a PVC is up and a loopback cell response is not received after the frequency (in seconds) argument is specified using the oam-pvc command, then loopback cells are sent at the retry-frequency to verify whether the PVC is down.


Defaults

For ATM PVCs and SVCs:

up-count = 3

down-count = 5

retry-frequency = 1 second

For control VCs:

up-count = 2

down-count = 2

retry-frequency = 2 seconds

Command Modes

Interface-ATM-VC configuration (for an ATM PVC or SVC)

VC-class configuration (for a VC class)

Bundle configuration mode (for a VC bundle)

PVC range configuration (for an ATM PVC range)

PVC-in-range configuration (for an individual PVC within a PVC range)

Control-VC configuration (for an LC-ATM VC)

Command History

Release
Modification

11.3 T

This command was introduced.

12.0(3)T

This command was modified to allow you to configure parameters related to OAM management for ATM VC bundles.

12.1(5)T

This command was made available in PVC range and PVC-in-range configuration modes.

12.3(2)T

This command was made available in control-VC configuration mode.

12.3(9)

This command was integrated into 12.3(9).


Usage Guidelines

These following guidelines apply to PVCs, SVCs, and VC classes. They do not apply to control VCs.

For ATM PVCs, SVCs, or VC bundles, if the oam retry command is not explicitly configured, the VC inherits the following default configuration (listed in order of precedence):

Configuration of the oam retry command in a VC class assigned to the PVC or SVC itself.

Configuration of the oam retry command in a VC class assigned to the PVC's or SVC's ATM subinterface.

Configuration of the oam retry command in a VC class assigned to the PVC's or SVC's ATM main interface.

Global default: up-count = 3, down-count = 5, retry-frequency = 1 second. This set of defaults assumes that OAM management is enabled using the oam-pvc or oam-svc command. The up-count and retry-frequency arguments do not apply to SVCs.

To use this command in bundle configuration mode, enter the bundle command to create the bundle or to specify an existing bundle before you enter this command.

If you use the oam retry command to configure a VC bundle, you configure all VC members of that bundle. VCs in a VC bundle are further subject to the following inheritance rules (listed in order of precedence):

VC configuration in bundle-vc mode

Bundle configuration in bundle mode (with effect of assigned VC-class configuration)

Subinterface configuration in subinterface mode

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the OAM management parameters with up-count 3, down-count 3, and the retry-frequency at 10 seconds:

Router(cfg-mpls-atm-cvc)# oam retry 3 3 10

Related Commands

Command1
Description

oam-bundle

Enables end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell generation and OAM management for a virtual circuit class that can be applied to a virtual circuit bundle.

oam-pvc

Enables end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell generation and OAM management for an ATM PVC or virtual circuit class.

oam-svc

Enables end-to-end F5 OAM loopback cell generation and OAM management for an ATM SVC or virtual circuit class.

1 Not all commands are supported for all types of VCs.


show atm vc

To display information about private ATM virtual circuits (VCs), use the show atm vc command in privileged EXEC mode.

show atm vc [vcd]

Syntax Description

vcd

(Optional) The virtual circuit descriptor (VCD) about which to display information.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

Private VCs exist on the control interface of an MPLS LSC to support corresponding VCs on an extended MPLS ATM interface.

VCs on the extended MPLS ATM interfaces do not appear in the show atm vc command output. Instead, the show xtagatm vc command provides similar output that shows information only on extended MPLS ATM VCs.

Examples

In the following example, no VCD is specified and private VCs are present:

Router# show atm vc
AAL /         Peak   Avg.  Burst       
Interface     VCD   VPI   VCI Type  Encapsulation  Kbps   Kbps  Cells Status
ATM1/0          1     0    40  PVC  AAL5-SNAP          0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0          2     0    41  PVC  AAL5-SNAP          0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0          3     0    42  PVC  AAL5-SNAP          0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0          4     0    43  PVC  AAL5-SNAP          0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0          5     0    44  PVC  AAL5-SNAP          0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0         15     1    32  PVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0         17     1    34  TVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0         26     1    43  TVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0         28     1    45  TVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0         29     1    46  TVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE  
ATM1/0         33     1    50  TVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE 

When you specify a VCD that corresponds to that of a private VC on a control interface, the display output appears as follows:

Router# show atm vc 15

ATM1/0 33     1    50  TVC  AAL5-XTAGATM       0      0     0 ACTIVE 
ATM1/0: VCD: 15, VPI: 1, VCI: 32, etype:0x8, AAL5 - XTAGATM, Flags: 0xD38
PeakRate: 0, Average Rate: 0, Burst Cells: 0, VCmode: 0x0 
XTagATM1, VCD: 1, VPI: 0, VCI: 32 
OAM DISABLED, InARP DISABLED 
InPkts: 38811, OutPkts: 38813, InBytes: 2911240, OutBytes: 2968834 
InPRoc: 0, OutPRoc: 0, Broadcasts: 0 
InFast: 0, OutFast: 0, InAS: 0, OutAS: 0 
OAM F5 cells sent: 0, OAM cells received: 0 
Status: ACTIVE

Table 17 describes the significant fields in the sample output.

Table 17 show atm vc Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
ATM1/0

Interface slot and number.

VCD

Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number).

VPI

Virtual path identifier.

VCI

Virtual circuit identifier.

etype

Ethernet type.

AAL5 - XTAGATM

Type of ATM adaptation layer (AAL) and encapsulation. A private VC has AAL5 and encapsulation xtagatm.

Flags 

Bit mask describing virtual circuit information. The flag values are summed to result in the displayed value.

0x10000 ABR VC
0x20000 CES VC
0x40000 TVC
0x100 TEMP (automatically created)
0x200 MULTIPOINT
0x400 DEFAULT_RATE
0x800 DEFAULT_BURST

0x10 ACTIVE
0x20 PVC
0x40 SVC
0x0 AAL5-SNAP
0x1 AAL5-NLPID
0x2 AAL5-FRNLPID
0x3 AAL5-MUX
0x4 AAL3/4-SMDS
0x5 QSAAL

0x6 AAL5-ILMI
0x7 AAL5-LANE
0x8 AAL5-XTAGATM
0x9 CES-AAL1
0xA F4-OAM

PeakRate

Number of packets transmitted at the peak rate.

Average Rate

Number of packets transmitted at the average rate.

Burst Cells

Value that, when multiplied by 32, equals the maximum number of ATM cells the virtual circuit can transmit at the peak rate of the virtual circuit.

VCmode

AIP-specific or NPM-specific register describing the usage of the virtual circuit. Contains values such as rate queue, peak rate, and AAL mode, which are also displayed in other fields.

XTagATM1

Interface of corresponding extended MPLS ATM VC.

VCD

Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number) of the corresponding extended MPLS ATM VC.

VPI

Virtual path identifier of the corresponding extended MPLS ATM VC.

VCI

Virtual channel identifier of the corresponding extended MPLS ATM VC.

OAM frequency

Seconds between OAM loopback messages or DISABLED if OAM is not in use on this VC.

InARP frequency

Minutes between InARP messages, or DISABLED if InARP is not in use on this VC.

InPkts

Total number of packets received on this virtual circuit. This number includes all silicon-switched, fast-switched, autonomous-switched, and process-switched packets.

OutPkts

Total number of packets sent on this virtual circuit. This number includes all silicon-switched, fast-switched, autonomous-switched, and process-switched packets.

InBytes

Total number of bytes received on this virtual circuit. This number includes all silicon-switched, fast-switched, autonomous-switched, and process-switched packets.

OutBytes

Total number of bytes sent on this virtual circuit. This number includes all silicon-switched, fast-switched, autonomous-switched, and process-switched packets.

InPRoc

Number of process-switched input packets.

OutPRoc

Number of process-switched output packets.

Broadcasts

Number of process-switched broadcast packets.

InFast

Number of fast-switched input packets.

OutFast

Number of fast-switched output packets.

InAS

Number of autonomous-switched or silicon-switched input packets.

OutAS

Number of autonomous-switched or silicon-switched output packets.

OAM F5 cells sent

Number of OAM cells sent on this virtual circuit.

OAM cells received

Number of OAM cells received on this virtual circuit.

Status

Displays the current state of the specified ATM interface.


show controllers vsi control-interface

To display information about an ATM interface that controls an external switch, use the show controllers vsi control-interface command in EXEC mode.

show controllers vsi control-interface [interface]

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) The interface number.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Examples

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi control-interface command:

Router# show controllers vsi control-interface

Interface:            ATM2/0        Connections:          14

The display shows the number of cross-connects currently on the switch that were established by the MPLS LSC through the VSI over the control interface.

Related Commands

Command
Description

mpls atm control-vc

Configures control VC VPI and VCI values for the initial link to the MPLS peer.


show controllers vsi descriptor

To display information about a switch interface discovered by the MPLS label switch controller (LSC) through the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI), use the show controllers vsi descriptor command in EXEC mode. You can specify an interface by its (switch-supplied) physical descriptor.

show controllers vsi descriptor [descriptor]

Syntax Description

descriptor

(Optional) Physical descriptor. For the Cisco BPX switch, the physical descriptor has the following form: slot.port.0


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

Per-interface information includes the following:

Interface name

Physical descriptor

Interface status

Physical interface state (supplied by the switch)

Acceptable VPI and VCI ranges

Maximum cell rate

Available cell rate (forward/backward)

Available channels

Similar information is displayed when you enter the show controllers xtagatm command. However, you must specify an IOS interface name instead of a physical descriptor.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi descriptor command:

Router# show controllers vsi descriptor 12.2.0

Phys desc: 12.2.0
Log intf:  0x000C0200 (0.12.2.0)
Interface: XTagATM0
IF status: up                   IFC state: ACTIVE 
Min VPI:   1                    Maximum cell rate:  10000 
Max VPI:   259                  Available channels: 2000 
Min VCI:   32                   Available cell rate (forward):  10000 
Max VCI:   65535                Available cell rate (backward): 10000 

Table 18 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 18 show controllers vsi descriptor Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Phys desc

Physical descriptor. A string learned from the switch that identifies the interface.

Log intf

Logical interface ID. This 32-bit entity, learned from the switch, uniquely identifies the interface.

Interface

The (IOS) interface name.

IF status

Overall interface status. Can be "up," "down," or "administratively down."

Min VPI

Minimum virtual path identifier. Indicates the low end of the VPI range configured on the switch.

Max VPI

Maximum virtual path identifier. Indicates the high end of the VPI range configured on the switch.

Min VCI

Minimum virtual channel identifier. Indicates the low end of the VCI range configured on the switch.

Max VCI

Maximum virtual channel identifier. Indicates the high end of the VCI range configured on, or determined by, the switch.

IFC state

Operational state of the interface, according to the switch. Can be one of the following:

ACTIVE

FAILED_EXT (that is, an external alarm)

FAILED_INT (indicates the inability of the MPLS LSC to communicate with the VSI slave controlling the interface, or another internal failure)

REMOVED (administratively removed from the switch)

Maximum cell rate

Maximum cell rate for the interface, which has been configured on the switch, in cells per second.

Available channels

Indicates the number of channels (endpoints) that are currently free to be used for cross-connects.

Available cell rate 
(forward)

Cell rate that is currently available in the forward (that is, ingress) direction for new cross-connects on the interface.

Available cell rate 
(backward)

Cell rate that is currently available in the backward (that is, egress) direction for new cross-connects on the interface.


Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers xtagatm

Displays information about an extended MPLS ATM interface.


show controllers vsi session

To display information about all sessions with Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) slaves, use the show controllers vsi session command in EXEC mode.

show controllers vsi session [session-num [interface interface]]


Note A session consists of an exchange of VSI messages between the VSI master (the LSC) and a VSI slave (an entity on the switch). There can be multiple VSI slaves for a switch. On the BPX switch, each port or trunk card assumes the role of a VSI slave.


Syntax Description

session-num

(Optional) The session number.

interface interface

(Optional) The VSI control interface.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

If a session number and an interface are specified, detailed information on the individual session is presented. If the session number is specified, but the interface is omitted, detailed information on all sessions with that number is presented.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi session command:

Router# show controllers vsi session 

Interface    Session  VCD    VPI/VCI    Switch/Slave Ids   Session State
ATM0/0       0        1      0/40       0/1                ESTABLISHED   
ATM0/0       1        2      0/41       0/2                ESTABLISHED 
ATM0/0       2        3      0/42       0/3                DISCOVERY 
ATM0/0       3        4      0/43       0/4                RESYNC-STARTING  
ATM0/0       4        5      0/44       0/5                RESYNC-STOPPING  
ATM0/0       5        6      0/45       0/6                RESYNC-UNDERWAY 
ATM0/0       6        7      0/46       0/7                UNKNOWN 
ATM0/0       7        8      0/47       0/8                UNKNOWN 
ATM0/0       8        9      0/48       0/9                CLOSING 
ATM0/0       9        10     0/49       0/10               ESTABLISHED 
ATM0/0       10       11     0/50       0/11               ESTABLISHED 
ATM0/0       11       12     0/51       0/12               ESTABLISHED 

Table 19 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 19 show controllers vsi session Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Interface

Control interface name.

Session

Session number (from 0 to <n-1>), where n is the number of sessions on the control interface.

VCD

Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number). Identifies the VC carrying the VSI protocol between the master and the slave for this session.

VPI/VCI

Virtual path identifier/virtual channel identifier (for the VC used for this session).

Switch/Slave Ids

Switch and slave identifiers supplied by the switch.

Session State

Indicates the status of the session between the master and the slave.

ESTABLISHED is the fully operational steady state.

UNKNOWN indicates that the slave is not responding.

Other possible states include the following:

CONFIGURING
RESYNC_STARTING
RESYNC_STOPPING
RESYNC_UNDERWAY
RESYNC_ENDING
DISCOVERY
SHUTDOWN_STARTING
SHUTDOWN_ENDING
INACTIVE
CLOSING


In the following example, session number 9 is specified with the show controllers vsi session command:

Router# show controllers vsi session 9

Interface:            ATM1/0        Session number:       9
VCD:                  10            VPI/VCI:              0/49
Switch type:          BPX           Switch id:            0
Controller id:        1             Slave id:             10
Keepalive timer:      15            Powerup session id:   0x0000000A
Cfg/act retry timer:  8/8           Active session id:    0x0000000A
Max retries:          10            Ctrl port log intf:   0x000A0100
Trap window:          50            Max/actual cmd wndw:  21/21
Trap filter:          all           Max checksums:        19
Current VSI version:  1             Min/max VSI version:  1/1
Messages sent:        2502          Inter-slave timer:    4.000
Messages received:    2502          Messages outstanding: 0

Table 20 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 20 show controllers vsi session Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Interface

Name of the control interface on which this session is configured.

Session number

A number from 0 to <n-1>, where n is the number of slaves. Configured on the MPLS LSC with the slaves option of the tag-control-protocol vsi command.

VCD

Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number). Identifies the VC that carries VSI protocol messages for this session.

VPI/VCI

Virtual path identifier or virtual channel identifier for the VC used for this session.

Switch type

Switch device (for example, the BPX switch).

Switch id

Switch identifier (supplied by the switch).

Controller id

Controller identifier. Configured on the LSC, as well as on the switch, with the id option of the tag-control-protocol vsi command.

Slave id

Slave identifier (supplied by the switch).

Keepalive timer

VSI master keepalive timeout period, in seconds. Configured on the MPLS LSC through the keepalive option of the label-control-protocol-vsi command. If no valid message is received by the MPLS LSC within this time period, it sends a keepalive message to the slave.

Powerup session id

Session ID (supplied by the slave) used at powerup time.

Cfg/act retry timer

Configured and actual message retry timeout period, in seconds. If no response is received for a command sent by the master within the actual retry timeout period, the message is re-sent. This applies to most message transmissions. The configured retry timeout value is specified through the retry option of the tag-control-protocol vsi command. The actual retry timeout value is the larger of the configured value and the minimum retry timeout value permitted by the switch.

Active session id

Session ID for the currently active session (supplied by the slave).

Max retries

Maximum number of times that a particular command transmission will be retried by the master. That is, a message may be sent up to <max_retries+1> times. Configured on the MPLS LSC through the retry option of the tag-control-protocol vsi command.

Ctrl port log intf

Logical interface identifier for the control port, as supplied by the switch.

Trap window

Maximum number of outstanding trap messages permitted by the master. This is advertised, but not enforced, by the LSC.

Max/actual cmd wndw

Maximum command window is the maximum number of outstanding (that is, unacknowledged) commands that may be sent by the master before waiting for acknowledgments. This number is communicated to the master by the slave.

The command window is the maximum number of outstanding commands that are permitted by the master, before it waits for acknowledgments. This is always less than the maximum command window.

Trap filter

This is always "all" for the LSC, indicating that it wants to receive all traps from the slave. This is communicated to the slave by the master.

Max checksums

Maximum number of checksum blocks supported by the slave.

Current VSI version

VSI protocol version currently in use by the master for this session. (In the first release, this is always 1.)

Min/max VSI version

Minimum and maximum VSI versions supported by the slave, as last reported by the slave. If both are zero, the slave has not yet responded to the master.

Messages sent

Number of commands sent to the slave.

Inter-slave timer

Timeout value associated by the slave for messages it sends to other slaves.

On a VSI-controlled switch with a distributed slave implementation (such as the BPX switch), VSI messages may be sent between slaves to complete their processing.

For the MPLS LSC VSI implementation to function properly, the value of its retry timer is forced to be at least two times the value of the inter-slave timer. (See "Cfg/act retry timer" in this table.)

Messages received

Number of responses and traps received by the master from the slave for this session.

Messages outstanding

Current number of outstanding messages (that is, commands sent by the master for which responses have not yet been received).


Related Commands

Command
Description

mpls atm control-vc

Configures control VC VPI and VCI values for the initial link to the MPLS peer.


show controllers vsi status

To display a one-line summary of each VSI-controlled interface, use the show controllers vsi status command in EXEC mode.

show controllers vsi status

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Related Commands

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.


Usage Guidelines

If an interface has been discovered by the LSC, but no extended MPLS ATM interface has been associated with it through the extended-port interface configuration command, then the interface name is marked <unknown>, and interface status is marked n/a.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi status command:

Router# show controllers vsi status

Interface Name                  IF Status   IFC State  Physical Descriptor 
switch control port                   n/a      ACTIVE  12.1.0 
XTagATM0                               up      ACTIVE  12.2.0 
XTagATM1                               up      ACTIVE  12.3.0 
<unknown>                             n/a  FAILED-EXT  12.4.0 

Table 21 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 21 show controllers vsi status Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Interface Name

The (IOS) interface name.

IF Status

Overall interface status. Can be "up," "down," or "administratively down."

IFC State

The operational state of the interface, according to the switch. Can be one of the following:

ACTIVE (indicated the interface is up)

FAILED_EXT (that is, an external alarm)

FAILED_INT (indicates the inability of the MPLS LSC to communicate with the VSI slave controlling the interface, or another internal failure)

REMOVED (administratively removed from the switch)

Physical Descriptor

A string learned from the switch that identifies the interface.


show controllers vsi traffic

To display traffic information about VSI-controlled interfaces, VSI sessions, or VCs on VSI-controlled interfaces, use the show controllers vsi traffic command in EXEC mode.

show controllers vsi traffic [{descriptor descriptor | session session-num | vc [descriptor descriptor [vpi vci ]]}]

Syntax Description

descriptor descriptor

Specifies the interface.

session session-num

Specifies a session number.

vc descriptor descriptor

Virtual circuit interface.

vpi

Virtual path identifier (0 to 4095).

vci

Virtual circuit identifier (0 to 65535).


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

The VPI range of values was extended to 4095.


Usage Guidelines

If none of the keywords is specified, traffic for all interfaces is displayed. You can specify a single interface by its (switch-supplied) physical descriptor. For the BPX switch, the physical descriptor has the form:

slot.port. 0

If a session number is specified, the output displays VSI protocol traffic by message type. The VC traffic display is also displayed by the show xtagatm cross-connect traffic descriptor command.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show controllers vsi traffic command:

Router# show controllers vsi traffic

Phys desc: 10.1.0
Interface: switch control port
IF status: n/a
Rx cells: 304250             Rx cells discarded: 0
Tx cells: 361186             Tx cells discarded: 0
Rx header errors: 4294967254 Rx invalid addresses (per card): 80360
Last invalid address: 0/53
Phys desc: 10.2.0
Interface: XTagATM0
IF status: up
Rx cells: 202637             Rx cells discarded: 0
Tx cells: 194979             Tx cells discarded: 0
Rx header errors: 4294967258 Rx invalid addresses (per card): 80385
Last invalid address: 0/32
Phys desc: 10.3.0
Interface: XTagATM1
IF status: up
Rx cells: 182295             Rx cells discarded: 0
Tx cells: 136369             Tx cells discarded: 0
Rx header errors: 4294967262 Rx invalid addresses (per card): 80372
Last invalid address: 0/32

Table 22 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 22 show controllers vsi traffic Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Phys desc

Physical descriptor of the interface.

Interface

The (IOS) interface name.

IF status

Operational status of the interface.

Rx cells

Number of cells received on the interface.

Tx cells

Number of cells transmitted on the interface.

Rx cells discarded

Number of cells received on the interface that were discarded due to traffic management.

Tx cells discarded

Number of cells that could not be transmitted on the interface due to traffic management and which were therefore discarded.

Rx header errors

Number of cells that were discarded due to ATM header errors.

Rx invalid addresses

Number of cells received with an invalid address (that is, an unexpected VPI/VCI combination). With the Cisco BPX switch, this count is of all such cells received on all interfaces in the port group of this interface.

Last invalid address

Number of cells received on this interface with ATM cell header errors.


The following sample output is displayed when you enter the show controllers vsi traffic session 9 command:

Router# show controllers vsi traffic session 9
                        Sent                                Received
Sw Get Cnfg Cmd:         3656       Sw Get Cnfg Rsp:         3656      
Sw Cnfg Trap Rsp:        0          Sw Cnfg Trap:            0         
Sw Set Cnfg Cmd:         1          Sw Set Cnfg Rsp:         1         
Sw Start Resync Cmd:     1          Sw Start Resync Rsp:     1         
Sw End Resync Cmd:       1          Sw End Resync Rsp:       1         
Ifc Getmore Cnfg Cmd:    1          Ifc Getmore Cnfg Rsp:    1         
Ifc Cnfg Trap Rsp:       4          Ifc Cnfg Trap:           4         
Ifc Get Stats Cmd:       8          Ifc Get Stats Rsp:       8         
Conn Cmt Cmd:            73         Conn Cmt Rsp:            73        
Conn Del Cmd:            50         Conn Del Rsp:            0         
Conn Get Stats Cmd:      0          Conn Get Stats Rsp:      0         
Conn Cnfg Trap Rsp:      0          Conn Cnfg Trap:          0         
Conn Bulk Clr Stats Cmd: 0          Conn Bulk Clr Stats Rsp: 0         
Gen Err Rsp:             0          Gen Err Rsp:             0         
unused:                  0          unused:                  0         
unknown:                 0          unknown:                 0         
TOTAL:                   3795       TOTAL:                   3795      

Table 23 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 23 show controllers vsi traffic session Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Sw Get Cnfg Cmd

Number of VSI "get switch configuration command" messages sent.

Sw Cnfg Trap Rsp

Number of VSI "switch configuration asynchronous trap response" messages sent.

Sw Set Cnfg Cmd

Number of VSI "set switch configuration command" messages sent.

Sw Start Resync Cmd

Number of VSI "set resynchronization start command" messages sent.

Sw End Resync Cmd

Number of VSI "set resynchronization end command" messages sent.

Ifc Getmore Cnfg Cmd

Number of VSI "get more interfaces configuration command" messages sent.

Ifc Cnfg Trap Rsp

Number of VSI "interface configuration asynchronous trap response" messages sent.

Ifc Get Stats Cmd

Number of VSI "get interface statistics command" messages sent.

Conn Cmt Cmd

Number of VSI "set connection committed command" messages sent.

Conn Del Cmd

Number of VSI "delete connection command" messages sent.

Conn Get Stats Cmd

Number of VSI "get connection statistics command" messages sent.

Conn Cnfg Trap Rsp

Number of VSI "connection configuration asynchronous trap response" messages sent.

Conn Bulk Clr Stats 
Cmd

Number of VSI "bulk clear connection statistics command" messages sent.

Gen Err Rsp

Number of VSI "generic error response" messages sent or received.

Sw Get Cnfg Rsp

Number of VSI "get connection configuration command response" messages received.

Sw Cnfg Trap

Number of VSI "switch configuration asynchronous trap" messages received.

Sw Set Cnfg Rsp

Number of VSI "set switch configuration response" messages received.

Sw Start Resync Rsp

Number of VSI "set resynchronization start response" messages received.

Sw End Resync Rsp

Number of VSI "set resynchronization end response" messages received.

Ifc Getmore Cnfg Rsp

Number of VSI "get more interfaces configuration response" messages received.

Ifc Cnfg Trap

Number of VSI "interface configuration asynchronous trap" messages received.

Ifc Get Stats Rsp

Number of VSI "get interface statistics response" messages received.

Conn Cmt Rsp

Number of VSI "set connection committed response" messages received.

Conn Del Rsp

Number of VSI "delete connection response" messages received.

Conn Get Stats Rsp

Number of VSI "get connection statistics response" messages received.

Conn Cnfg Trap

Number of VSI "connection configuration asynchronous trap" messages received.

Conn Bulk Clr Stats 
Rsp 

Number of VSI "bulk clear connection statistics response" messages received.

unused, unknown

"Unused" messages are those whose function codes are recognized as being part of the VSI protocol, but which are not used by the MPLS LSC and, consequently, are not expected to be received or sent.

"Unknown" messages have function codes that the MPLS LSC does not recognize as part of the VSI protocol.

TOTAL

Total number of VSI messages sent or received.


show controllers xtagatm

To display information about an extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interface controlled through the Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) protocol, use the show controllers xtagatm command in EXEC mode.

show controllers xtagatm if-num

Syntax Description

if-num

The interface number.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

Per-interface information includes the following:

Interface name

Physical descriptor

Interface status

Physical interface state (supplied by the switch)

Acceptable VPI and VCI ranges

Maximum cell rate

Available cell rate (forward/backward)

Available channels

Examples

In this example, the sample output is from the show controllers xtagatm command specifying interface 0.

Router# show controllers xtagatm 0

Interface XTagATM0 is up 
Hardware is Tag-Controlled ATM Port (on BPX switch BPX-VSI1) 
Control interface ATM1/0 is up 
Physical descriptor is 10.2.0 
Logical interface 0x000A0200 (0.10.2.0) 
Oper state ACTIVE, admin state UP 
VPI range 1-255, VCI range 32-65535 
VPI is not translated at end of link 
Tag control VC need not be strictly in VPI/VCI range 
Available channels: ingress 30, egress 30 
Maximum cell rate: ingress 300000, egress 300000 
Available cell rate: ingress 300000, egress 300000 
Endpoints in use: ingress 7, egress 8, ingress/egress 1 
Rx cells 134747 
rx cells discarded 0, rx header errors 0 
rx invalid addresses (per card): 52994 
last invalid address 0/32 
Tx cells 132564 
tx cells discarded: 0

Table 24 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 24 show controllers xtagatm Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Interface XTagATM0 is 
up

The overall status of the interface, which can be "up," "down," or "administratively down."

Hardware is 
Tag-Controlled ATM 
Port

The hardware type.

If the XtagATM interface is assigned to a switch port, the following text is displayed as well:

on switch-type switch switch-name 

The string indicates the type of switch and the switch name learned from the switch.

If the XtagATM interface not assigned to a switch interface, the following text is displayed:

Not bound to a control interface and switch port

If the XtagATM interface is assigned to a switch interface, but the target switch interface has not been discovered by the LSC, the following text is displayed:

Bound to undiscovered switch port (id number) 

The variable number is the logical interface ID in hexadecimal notation.

Control interface 
ATM1/0 is up

The XtagATM interface was assigned to the VSI master, whose control interface is ATM1/0. This control interface is up.

Physical descriptor 
is...

A string identifying the interface that was learned from the switch.

Logical interface

A 32-bit entity, learned from the switch, that identifies the interface. It appears in both hexadecimal and dotted quad notation.

Oper state

Operational state of the interface, according to the switch. The state can be one of the following:

ACTIVE

FAILED_EXT (that is, an external alarm)

FAILED_INT (indicates the inability of the MPLS LSC to communicate with the VSI slave controlling the interface, or another internal failure)

REMOVED (administratively removed from the switch)

admin state

Administrative state of the interface, which can be either Up or Down.

VPI range 1-255

The allowable VPI range for the interface that was configured on the switch.

VCI range 32-65535

The allowable VCI range for the interface that was configured on, or determined by, the switch.

Tag control VC need 
not be strictly in 
VPI/VCI range

The label control VC does not need to be within the range specified by VPI range, but may be on VPI 0 instead.

Available channels

The number of channels (endpoints) that are currently free to be used for cross-connects.

Maximum cell rate

Maximum cell rate for the interface, which was configured on the switch.

Available cell rate

Cell rate that is currently available for new cross-connects on the interface.

Endpoints in use

Number of endpoints (channels) in use on the interface, broken down by anticipated traffic flow, as follows:

Ingress—Endpoints carry traffic into the switch

Egress—Endpoints carry traffic away from the switch

Ingress/egress—Endpoints carry traffic in both directions

Rx cells

Number of cells received on the interface.

rx cells discarded 

Number of cells received on the interface that were discarded due to traffic management actions (rx header errors).

rx header errors

Number of cells received on the interface with cell header errors.

rx invalid addresses 
(per card)

Number of cells received with invalid addresses (that is, unexpected VPI or VCI). On the BPX switch, this counter is maintained per port group (not per interface).

last invalid address

Address of the last cell received on the interface with an invalid address (for example, 0/32).

Tx cells

Number of cells transmitted from the interface.

tx cells discarded

Number of cells intended for transmission from the interface that were discarded due to traffic management actions.


Related Commands

Command
Description

show controllers vsi descriptor

Displays information about a switch interface discovered by the MPLS LSC through the VSI.


show interface xtagatm

To display information about an extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interface, use the show interface xtagatm command in EXEC mode.

show interface xtagatm if-num

Syntax Description

if-num

The XtagATM interface number.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

XtagATM interfaces are virtual interfaces that are created on first reference like tunnel interfaces. XtagATM interfaces are similar to ATM interfaces, except that the former only supports LC-ATM encapsulation.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show interface xtagatm command:

Router# show interface xtagatm0

XTagATM0 is up, line protocol is up 
  Hardware is Tag-Controlled Switch Port
  Interface is unnumbered.  Using address of Loopback0 (12.0.0.17)
  MTU 4470 bytes, BW 156250 Kbit, DLY 80 usec, rely 255/255, load 1/255
  Encapsulation ATM Tagswitching, loopback not set
  Encapsulation(s): AAL5
  Control interface: ATM1/0, switch port: bpx 10.2
  9 terminating VCs, 16 switch cross-connects
  Switch port traffic:
     129302 cells input, 127559 cells output
  Last input 00:00:04, output never, output hang never
  Last clearing of "show interface" counters never
  Queueing strategy: fifo
  Output queue 0/0, 0 drops; input queue 0/75, 0 drops
  Terminating traffic:
  5 minute input rate 1000 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec
  5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 1 packets/sec
     61643 packets input, 4571695 bytes, 0 no buffer
     Received 0 broadcasts, 0 runts, 0 giants
     0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored, 0 abort
     53799 packets output, 4079127 bytes, 0 underruns
     0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets
     0 output buffers copied, 0 interrupts, 0 failures

Table 25 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 25 show interface xtagatm Command Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
XTagATM0 is up

The status of the interface.

line protocol is up

The status of the line protocol.

Hardware is 
Tag-Controlled Switch 
Port

The hardware type.

Interface is 
unnumbered

The type of interface.

MTU

Maximum transmission unit of the extended MPLS ATM interface.

BW

Bandwidth of the interface in kilobytes per second.

DLY

Delay of the interface in microseconds.

rely

Reliability of the interface as a fraction of 255/ (255/255 is 100% reliability), calculated as an exponential average over 5 minutes.

load

The load on the interface as a fraction of 255 (255/255 is completely saturated), calculated as an exponential average over 5 minutes.

Encapsulation ATM 
Tagswitching

Encapsulation method.

loopback not set

The setting of the loopback.

Encapsulation(s)

The ATM adaptation layer.

Control interface

The control switch port with which the XtagATM interface has been associated.

9 terminating VCs

Number of terminating VCs with an endpoint on this XtagATM interface. Packets are transmitted and/or received by the MPLS LSC on a terminating VC, or are forwarded between an LSC-controlled switch port and a router interface.

16 switch 
cross-connects

Number of switch cross-connects on the external switch with an endpoint on the switch port that corresponds to this interface. This includes cross-connects to terminating VCs that carry data to and from the LSC, as well as cross-connects that bypass the MPLS LSC and switch cells directly to other ports.

Switch port traffic

Number of cells received and transmitted on all cross-connects associated with this interface.

Terminating traffic 
counts

Counters below this line apply only to packets transmitted or received on terminating VCs.

5-minute input rate, 
5-minute output rate

Average number of bits and packets transmitted per second in the last 5 minutes.

packets input

Total number of error-free packets received by the system.

bytes

Total number of bytes, including data and MAC encapsulation, in the error-free packets received by the system.

no buffer

Number of received packets discarded because there was no buffer space in the main system. Compare with ignored count. Broadcast storms on Ethernet systems and bursts of noise on serial lines are often responsible for no input buffer events.

broadcasts

Total number of broadcast or multicast packets received by the interface.

runts

Number of packets that are discarded because they are smaller than the medium's minimum packet size.

giants

Number of packets that are discarded because they exceed the medium's maximum packet size.

input errors

Total number of no buffer, runts, giants, CRCs, frame, overrun, ignored and abort counts. Other input-related errors can also increment the count, so that this sum may not balance with other counts.

CRC

Cyclic redundancy checksum generated by the originating LAN station or far end device does not match the checksum calculated from the data received.

On a LAN, this usually indicates noise or transmission problems on the LAN interface or the LAN bus. A high number of CRCs is usually the result of traffic collisions or a station transmitting bad data.

On a serial link, CRCs usually indicate noise, gain hits or other transmission problems on the data link.

frame

Number of packets received incorrectly having a CRC error and a noninteger number of octets.

overrun

Number of times the serial receiver hardware was unable to hand received data to a hardware buffer because the input rate exceeded the receiver's ability to handle the data.

ignored

Number of received packets ignored by the interface because the interface hardware ran low on internal buffers. These buffers are different from the system buffers mentioned previously in the buffer description. Broadcast storms and bursts of noise can cause the ignored count to be incremented.

abort

Illegal sequence of one bits on the interface. This usually indicates a clocking problem between the interface and the data link equipment.

packets output

Total number of messages transmitted by the system.

bytes

Total number of bytes, including data and MAC encapsulation, transmitted by the system.

underruns

Number of times that the transmitter has been running faster than the router can handle data. This condition may never be reported on some interfaces.

output errors

Sum of all errors that prevented the final transmission of datagrams out of the interface being examined. Note that this may not balance with the sum of the enumerated output errors, since some datagrams may have more than one error, and others may have errors that do not fall into any of the specifically tabulated categories.

collisions

Number of messages retransmitted due to an Ethernet collision. This is usually the result of an overextended LAN (Ethernet or transceiver cable too long, more than two repeaters between stations, or too many cascaded multiport transceivers). A packet that collides is counted only one time in output packets.

interface resets

Number of times an interface has been completely reset. Resets occur if packets queued for transmission were not sent within several seconds. On a serial line, this can be caused by a malfunctioning modem that is not supplying the transmit clock signal, or by a cable problem. If the system notices that the carrier detect line of a serial interface is up, but the line protocol is down, it periodically resets the interface in an effort to restart it. Interface resets can also occur when an interface is looped back or shut down.

output buffers copied

Number of packets copied from an MEMD buffer into a system buffer before being placed on the output hold queue.

interrupts

The value of hwidb to tx_restarts.

failures

Number of packets discarded because no MEMD buffer was available.


Related Commands

Command
Description

interface xtagatm

Creates an XtagATM interface.


show mpls atm-ldp bindings

To display the requested entries from the ATM label distribution protocol (LDP) label bindings database, use the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command in EXEC mode.

show mpls atm-ldp bindings [A.B.C.D {mask | length}]
[local-label vpi vci] [remote-label vpi vci] [neighbor atm slot/subslot/port] [vc-merged] [path]

Syntax Description

A.B.C.D

(Optional) Destination of prefix.

mask

(Optional) Destination netmask prefix.

length

(Optional) Netmask length, in the range from 1 to 32.

local-label vpi vci

(Optional) Matches locally assigned label values. (VPI range is 0 to 4095. VCI range is 0 to 65535.)

remote-label vpi vci

(Optional) Matches remotely assigned label values. (VPI range is 0 to 4095. VCI range is 0 to 65535.)

neighbor atm slot/subslot/port

(Optional) Matches labels assigned by a neighbor on the specified ATM interface.

vc-merged

(Optional) Lists the merged VCs.

path

(Optional) Displays the path of an LVC, from source to destination.


Defaults

Displays all database entries.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.
The VPI range of values was extended to 4095.

12.2(8)T

This command was modified to include the vc-merged keyword.

12.3(2)T6

This command was modified to include the path keyword.

12.3(9)

This command was integrated into 12.3(9).


Usage Guidelines

The display output can show the entire database or a subset of entries based on the prefix, the VC label value, or an assigning interface.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command:

Router# show mpls atm-ldp bindings

Destination: 10.13.13.6/32
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (2 hops) 1/33 Active, VCD=8, CoS=available
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (2 hops) 1/34 Active, VCD=9, CoS=standard
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (2 hops) 1/35 Active, VCD=10, CoS=premium
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (2 hops) 1/36 Active, VCD=11, CoS=control

Destination: 192.168.0.0/8
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (1 hop) 1/37 Active, VCD=4, CoS=available
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (1 hop) 1/34 Active, VCD=5, CoS=standard
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (1 hop) 1/35 Active, VCD=6, CoS=premium
     Headend Router ATM1/0.1 (1 hop) 1/36 Active, VCD=7, CoS=control

Destination: 10.0.0.18/32
     Tailend Router ATM1/0.1 1/33 Active, VCD=8

The following is sample output from the show mpls atm-ldp bindings command with the path keyword:

Router# show mpls atm-ldp bindings 10.0.2.115 32 path

 Destination: 10.0.2.115/32
    Headend Router Switch1.1 (2 hops) 0/39  Active, VCD=9, CoS=available
       Path:    10.0.2.102*     10.0.3.42       10.0.2.115	
    Headend Router Switch1.1 (2 hops) 0/41  Active, VCD=8, CoS=premium
       Path:    10.0.2.102*     10.0.3.42       10.0.2.115
    Headend Router Switch1.1 (2 hops) 0/43  Active, VCD=7, CoS=control
       Path:    10.0.2.102*     10.0.3.42       10.0.2.115

Table 26 describes the significant fields shown in the display.

Table 26 show mpls atm-ldp bindings Field Descriptions 

Field
Description

Destination:

Destination IP address/length of netmask.

Headend Router

VC type:

Headend—VC that originates at this router

Tailend—VC that terminates at this router

Transit—VC that passes through this router

ATM1/0.1

ATM interface.

1/33

VPI/VCI

Active

LVC state:

Active—Set up and working

Bindwait—Waiting for response

VCD=

Virtual circuit descriptor number.

CoS=

Label virtual circuit type for class of service categories:

Available—CoS = 0

Standard—CoS = 1

Premium—CoS = 2

Control—CoS = 3

Path

The path of the LVC. The asterisk (*) next to the first prefix indicates that the command was issued from that router. This output displays when you issue the path keyword.


Related Commands

Command
Description

show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

Displays the number of bindings waiting for label assignments for a remote MPLS ATM switch.


show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

To display the number of bindings waiting for label assignments from a remote MPLS ATM switch, use the show mpls atm-ldp bindwait command in EXEC mode.

show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Examples

The following shows a sample display using this command:

Router# show mpls atm-ldp bindwait

If everything is working properly, this command does not display any output.

Related Commands

Command
Description

show mpls atm-ldp bindings

Displays requested entries from the ATM LDP label binding database.


show mpls atm-ldp capability

To display the Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) ATM capabilities negotiated with Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) neighbors for label-controlled ATM (LC-ATM) interfaces, use the show mpls atm-ldp capability command in privileged EXEC mode.

show mpls atm-ldp capability

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

11.1CT

This command was introduced.

12.0(10)ST

This command was modified to reflect Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) command syntax and terminology.

12.1(8a)E

This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.1(8a)E.

12.2(2)T

This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(2)T.


Usage Guidelines

When two label switch routers (LSRs) establish an LDP session, they negotiate parameters for the session, such as the range of virtual path identifiers (VPIs) and virtual channel identifiers (VCIs) that will be used as labels.

This command displays the MPLS ATM capabilities negotiated by LDP or the Tag Distribution Protocol (TDP).

Examples

The following is sample output from the show mpls atm-ldp capability command:

Router# show mpls atm-ldp capability

               VPI           VCI           Alloc   Odd/Even  VC Merge 
ATM0/1/0       Range         Range         Scheme  Scheme    IN   OUT  
  Negotiated   [100 - 101]   [33 - 1023]   UNIDIR            -    -    
  Local        [100 - 101]   [33 - 16383]  UNIDIR            EN   EN   
  Peer         [100 - 101]   [33 - 1023]   UNIDIR            -    -    
               VPI           VCI           Alloc   Odd/Even  VC Merge     
ATM0/1/1       Range         Range         Scheme  Scheme    IN   OUT  
  Negotiated   [201 - 202]   [33 - 1023]   BIDIR             -    -    
  Local        [201 - 202]   [33 - 16383]  UNIDIR  ODD       NO   NO   
  Peer         [201 - 202]   [33 - 1023]   BIDIR   EVEN      -    -    

Table 27 describes the fields shown in the display.

Table 27 show mpls atm-ldp capability Field Descriptions 

Field
Description

VPI Range

Minimum and maximum numbers of VPIs supported on this interface.

VCI Range

Minimum and maximum numbers of VCIs supported on this interface.

Alloc Scheme

Indicates the applicable allocation scheme, as follows:

UNIDIR—Unidirectional capability indicates that the peer can, within a single VPI, support binding of the same VCI to different prefixes on different directions of the link.

BIDIR—Bidirectional capability indicates that within a single VPI, a single VCI can appear in one binding only. In this case, one peer allocates bindings in the even VCI space, and the other in the odd VCI space. The system with the lower LDP identifier assigns even-numbered VCIs.

The negotiated allocation scheme is UNIDIR, only if, both peers have UNIDIR capability. Otherwise, the allocation scheme is BIDIR.

Note These definitions for unidirectional and bidirectional are consistent with normal ATM usage of the terms; however, they are exactly opposite from the definitions for them in the IETF LDP specification.

Odd/Even Scheme

Indicates whether the local device or the peer is assigning an odd- or even-numbered VCI when the negotiated scheme is BIDIR. It does not display any information when the negotiated scheme is UNIDIR.

VC Merge

Indicates the type of virtual circuit merge support available on this interface. There are two possibilities, as follows:

IN—Indicates the input interface merge capability. IN displays the following values:

EN—The hardware interface supports virtual circuit merge, and virtual circuit merge is enabled on the device.

DIS—The hardware interface supports virtual circuit merge and virtual circuit merge is disabled on the device.

NO—The hardware interface does not support virtual circuit merge.

OUT—Indicates the output interface merge capability. OUT displays the same values as the input merge side.

The virtual circuit merge capability is meaningful only on ATM switches. This capability is not negotiated.

Negotiated

Indicates the set of options that both LDP peers have agreed to share on this interface. For example, the VPI or VCI allocation on either peer remains within the negotiated range.

Local

Indicates the options supported locally on this interface.

Peer

Indicates the options supported by the remote LDP peer on this interface.


Related Commands

Command
Description

mpls ldp atm vc-merge

Controls whether ATM-virtual circuit merge (multipoint-to-point) is supported for unicast label virtual circuits.


show mpls atm-ldp summary

To display summary information about all the entries in the ATM label binding database, use the show mpls atm-ldp summary command in privileged EXEC mode.

show mpls atm-ldp summary

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

11.1CT

This command was introduced.

12.0(10)ST

This command was modified to reflect MPLS IETF command syntax and terminology.

12.2(2)T

This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.2(2)T.

12.0(22)S

This command was integrated into Cisco IOS Release 12.0(22)S.


Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display dynamic ATM accounting information.

Examples

The following shows sample output from the show mpls atm-ldp summary command:

Router# show mpls atm-ldp summary

Total number of destinations: 406
ATM label bindings summary
interface      total   active  local   remote  Bwait   Rwait   IFwait  
ATM0/0/0       406     406     404     2       0       0       0       
ATM0/0/1       406     406     3       403     0       0       0       

Table 28 describes the significant fields shown in the display.

Table 28 show mpls atm-ldp summary Field Descriptions 

Field
Description

Total number of destinations

Number of destination address prefixes in the LC-ATM database.

interface

Name of an interface with associated ATM label bindings.

total

Total number of ATM labels on this interface.

active

Number of ATM labels in an "active" state that are ready to use for data transfer.

local

Number of ATM labels on this interface assigned by this label-switch router (LSR).

remote

Number of ATM labels on this interface assigned by the neighbor LSR.

Bwait

Number of bindings that are waiting for a label assignment from the downstream neighbor LSR.

Rwait

Number of bindings that are waiting for resources (VPI/VCI space) to be available on the downstream device.

IFwait

Number of bindings that are waiting for learned labels to be installed for switching use. For an ATM label switch router, this value is 0.


Related Commands

Command
Description

show mpls atm-ldp bindings

Displays the requested entries from the ATM LDP label binding database.


show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm

To display information about class of service (CoS) bandwidth allocation on extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interfaces, use the show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm command in EXEC mode.

show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm [interface number]

Syntax Description

interface number

(Optional) The XtagATM interface number.


Defaults

Available 50%, control 50%.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display CoS bandwidth allocation information for the following CoS traffic categories:

Available

Standard

Premium

Control

Examples

The following example shows output from this command:

Router# show xtagatm cos-bandwidth-allocation xtagatm 123

CoS             Bandwidth allocation
available       25%
standard        25%
premium         25%
control         25%

show xtagatm cross-connect

To display information about the label switch controller (LSC) view of the cross-connect table on the remotely controlled ATM switch, use the show xtagatm cross-connect command in EXEC mode.

show xtagatm cross-connect [traffic] [{interface interface [vpi vci] |
descriptor descriptor [vpi vci]]

Syntax Description

traffic

The receive and transmit cell counts for each connection.

interface interface

Connections with an endpoint of the specified interface.

vpi vci

Displays only detailed information on the endpoint with the specified VPI/VCI on the specified interface. (VPI range is 0 to 4095. VCI range is 0 to 65535.)

descriptor descriptor

Displays only connections with an endpoint on the interface with the specified physical descriptor.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Related Commands

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Examples

Each connection is listed twice in the output from the show xtagatm cross-connect command, because it shows each interface that is linked by the connection.

The following is sample output from the show xtagatm cross-connect command:

Router# show xtagatm cross-connect

Phys Desc    VPI/VCI     Type   X-Phys Desc  X-VPI/VCI   State 

10.1.0       1/37        ->     10.3.0       1/35        UP  
10.1.0       1/34        ->     10.3.0       1/33        UP  
10.1.0       1/33        <->    10.2.0       0/32        UP  
10.1.0       1/32        <->    10.3.0       0/32        UP  
10.1.0       1/35        <-     10.3.0       1/34        UP  
10.2.0       1/57        ->     10.3.0       1/49        UP  
10.2.0       1/53        ->     10.3.0       1/47        UP  
10.2.0       1/48        <-     10.1.0       1/50        UP  
10.2.0       0/32        <->    10.1.0       1/33        UP  
10.3.0       1/34        ->     10.1.0       1/35        UP  
10.3.0       1/49        <-     10.2.0       1/57        UP  
10.3.0       1/47        <-     10.2.0       1/53        UP  
10.3.0       1/37        <-     10.1.0       1/38        UP  
10.3.0       1/35        <-     10.1.0       1/37        UP  
10.3.0       1/33        <-     10.1.0       1/34        UP 
10.3.0       0/32        <->    10.1.0       1/32        UP 

Table 29 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 29 show xtagatm cross-connect Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
Phys desc

Physical descriptor. A switch-supplied string identifying the interface on which the endpoint exists.

VPI/VCI

Virtual path identifier and virtual channel identifier for this endpoint.

Type

The type can be one of the following:

A right arrow (->) indicates an ingress endpoint, where traffic is received into the switch.

A left arrow (<-) indicates an egress endpoint, where traffic is transmitted from the interface.

A bidirectional arrow (<->) indicates that traffic is both transmitted and received at this endpoint.

X-Phys Desc

Physical descriptor for the interface of the other endpoint belonging to the cross-connect.

X-VPI/VCI

Virtual path identifier and virtual channel identifier of the other endpoint belonging to the cross-connect.

State

Indicates the status of the cross-connect to which this endpoint belongs. The state is typically UP; other values, all of which are transient, include the following:

DOWN
ABOUT_TO_DOWN
ABOUT_TO_CONNECT
CONNECTING
ABOUT_TO_RECONNECT
RECONNECTING
ABOUT_TO_RESYNC
RESYNCING
NEED_RESYNC_RETRY
ABOUT_TO_RESYNC_RETRY RETRYING_RESYNC
ABOUT_TO_DISCONNECT
DISCONNECTING


A sample of the detailed command output provided for a single endpoint is shown below.

Router# show xtagatm cross-connect descriptor 12.1.0 1 42 

Phys desc:   12.1.0
Interface:   n/a
Intf type:   switch control port
VPI/VCI:     1/42
X-Phys desc: 12.2.0
X-Interface: XTagATM0
X-Intf type: extended tag ATM
X-VPI/VCI:   2/38
Conn-state:  UP
Conn-type:   input/output
Cast-type:   point-to-point
Rx service type:   MPLS COS 0
Rx cell rate:      n/a
Rx peak cell rate: 10000
Tx service type:   MPLS COS 0
Tx cell rate:      n/a
Tx peak cell rate: 10000

Table 30 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 30 show xtagatm cross-connect Descriptor Field Descriptions 

Field
Description
Phys desc

Physical descriptor. A switch-supplied string identifying the interface on which the endpoint exists.

Interface

The (IOS) interface name.

Intf type

Interface type. Can be either extended MPLS ATM or switch control port.

VPI/VCI

Virtual path identifier and virtual channel identifier for this endpoint.

X-Phys desc

Physical descriptor for the interface of the other endpoint belonging to the cross-connect.

X-Interface

The (IOS) name for the interface of the other endpoint belonging to the cross-connect.

X-Intf type

Interface type for the interface of the other endpoint belonging to the cross-connect.

X-VPI/VCI

Virtual path identifier and virtual channel identifier of the other endpoint belonging to the cross-connect.

Conn-state

Indicates the status of the cross-connect to which this endpoint belongs. The cross-connect state is typically UP; other values, all of which are transient, include the following:

DOWN ABOUT_TO_DOWN ABOUT_TO_CONNECT
CONNECTING
ABOUT_TO_RECONNECT
RECONNECTING
ABOUT_TO_RESYNC
RESYNCING
NEED_RESYNC_RETRY
ABOUT_TO_RESYNC_RETRY
RETRYING_RESYNC
ABOUT_TO_DISCONNECT
DISCONNECTING

Conn-type

Input—Indicates an ingress endpoint where traffic is only expected to be received into the switch

Output—Indicates an egress endpoint, where traffic is only expected to be transmitted from the interface

Input/output—Indicates that traffic is expected to be both transmitted and received at this endpoint

Cast-type

Indicates whether or not the cross-connect is multicast. In the first release, this is always point-to-point.

Rx service type

Class of service type for the receive, or ingress, direction. This is MPLS COS <n>, (MPLS Class of Service <n>), where n is in the range 0-7 for input and input/output endpoints; this will be n/a for output endpoints. (In the first release, this is either 0 or 7.)

Rx cell rate

(Guaranteed) cell rate in the receive, or ingress, direction. In the first release, this is always n/a.

Rx peak cell rate

Peak cell rate in the receive, or ingress, direction, in cells per second. This is n/a for an output endpoint.

Tx service type

Class of service type for the transmit, or egress, direction. This is MPLS COS <n>, (MPLS Class of Service <n>), where n is in the range 0-7 for output and input/output endpoints; this will be n/a for input endpoints. (In the first release, n will be either 0 or 7.)

Tx cell rate

(Guaranteed) cell rate in the transmit, or egress, direction. In the first release, this is always n/a.

Tx peak cell rate

Peak cell rate in the transmit, or egress, direction, in cells per second. This is n/a for an input endpoint.


show xtagatm vc

To display information about terminating virtual circuits (VCs) on extended MPLS ATM (XtagATM) interfaces, use the show xtagatm vc command in EXEC mode.

show xtagatm vc [vcd [interface]]

Syntax Description

vcd

(Optional) Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number). If you specify the vcd argument, information displays about all VCs with that VCD.

interface

(Optional) Interface number. If you specify the interface and the vcd arguments, information displays about the specified VC on the specified interface.


Defaults

This command has no default behavior or values.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release
Modifications

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(4)T

This command was updated to reflect the MPLS IETF terminology.


Usage Guidelines

The columns marked VCD, VPI, and VCI display information for the corresponding private VC on the control interface. The private VC connects the XtagATM VC to the external switch. It is termed private because its VPI and VCI are only used for communication between the MPLS LSC and the switch, and it is different from the VPI and VCI seen on the XtagATM interface and the corresponding switch port.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show xtagatm vc command.

Router# show xtagatm vc
AAL / Control Interface 
Interface     VCD   VPI   VCI Type  Encapsulation  VCD   VPI   VCI Status
XTagATM0        1     0    32  PVC  AAL5-SNAP        2     0    33 ACTIVE
XTagATM0        2     1    33  TVC  AAL5-MUX         4     0    37 ACTIVE
XTagATM0        3     1    34  TVC  AAL5-MUX         6     0    39 ACTIVE

Table 31 describes the significant fields in the sample command output shown above.

Table 31 show xtagatm vc Command Field Descriptions

Field
Description
VCD

Virtual circuit descriptor (virtual circuit number).

VPI

Virtual path identifier.

VCI

Virtual circuit identifier.

Type

The type of VC.

Control Interf. VCD

VCD for the corresponding private VC on the control interface.

Control Interf. VPI

VPI for the corresponding private VC on the control interface.

Control Interf. VCI

VCI for the corresponding private VC on the control interface.

Encapsulation

Displays the type of connection on the interface.

Status

Displays the current state of the specified ATM interface.


Related Commands

Command
Description

oam-pvc

Displays information about private ATM VCs.

show xtagatm cross-connect

Displays information about remotely connected ATM switches.


tag-control-protocol vsi

To configure the use of Virtual Switch Interface (VSI) on a particular master control port, use the tag-control-protocol vsi command in interface configuration mode. To disable VSI, use the no form of this command.

tag-control-protocol vsi [base-vc vpi vci] [delay seconds] [id controller-id] [keepalive timeout] [nak [basic | extended]] [retry timeout-count] [slaves slave-count]

no tag-control-protocol vsi [base-vc vpi vci] [delay seconds] [id controller-id] [keepalive timeout] [nak [basic | extended]] [retry timeout-count] [slaves slave-count]

Syntax Description

base-vc vpi vci

(Optional) Determines the VPI/VCI value for the channel to the first slave. The default is 0/40.

Together with the slave value, this value determines the VPI/VCI values for the channels to all of the slaves, which are as follows:

vpi/vci

vpi/vci+1, and so on

vpi/vci+slave-count-1

delay seconds

(Optional) Specifies the delay time to start a new VSI session after the system comes up or after you enter the command. If a VSI session is already running, the delay keyword has no effect for the current session. The delay is implemented when a new VSI session starts. The default is 0. The valid range of values is 0 to 300.

id controller-id

(Optional) Determines the value of the controller-id field present in the header of each VSI message. The default is 1.

keepalive timeout

(Optional) Determines the value of the keepalive timer (in seconds). Make sure that the keepalive timer value is greater than the value of the retry timer times the retry timer +1. The default is 15 seconds.

nak [basic | extended]

(Optional) Allows the label switch controller (LSC) to request extended negative acknowledgment (NAK) responses from the VSI slave. The extended NAK response indicates a dangling connection on the VSI slave. If the slave sends an extended NAK response code, the LSC sends a delete connection command that enables the VSI slave to delete the dangling connection.

Use the basic keyword to specify the NAK 11 and NAK 12 response codes from the VSI. If you use the nak basic keywords, support for extended NAK is not enabled on the LSC. The interface configuration does not indicate that basic NAK support is enabled. The output of the show controller vsi session command does not indicate that basic NAK support is enabled.

Use the extended keyword to specify extended NAK codes 51 - 54 from the VSI, which are supported in VSI protocol version 2.4. If you use the nak extended keywords, support for extended NAK is enabled on the LSC. The interface configuration indicates that extended NAK support is enabled. The output of the show controller vsi session command also indicates that extended NAK support is enabled.

Note Use the nak extended keyword only if all VSI slaves support extended NAK codes.

retry timeout-count

(Optional) Determines the value of the message retry timer (in seconds) and the maximum number of retries. The default is 8 seconds and 10 retries.

slaves slave-count

(Optional) Determines the number of slaves reachable through this master control port. The default is 14 (suitable for the Cisco BPX switch).


Defaults

VSI is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release
Modification

12.0(5)T

This command was introduced.

12.2(15)T

The delay keyword was added.

12.3(2)T

The nak keyword was added.


Usage Guidelines

The command is only available on interfaces that can serve as a VSI master control port. Cisco recommends that all options to the tag-control-protocol vsi command be entered at the same time.

After VSI is active on the control interface (through the earlier issuance of a tag-control-protocol vsi command), reentering the command may cause all associated XTagATM interfaces to shut down and restart. In particular, if you reenter the tag-control-protocol vsi command with any of the following options, the VSI shuts down and reactivates on the control interface:

id

base-vc

slaves

The VSI remains continuously active (that is, the VSI does not shut down and then reactivate) if you reenter the tag-control-protocol vsi command with only one or both of the following options:

keepalive

retry

delay

In either case, if you reenter the tag-control-protocol vsi command, this causes the specified options to take on the newly specified values; the other options retain their previous values. To restore default values to all the options, enter the no tag-control-protocol command, followed by the tag-control-protocol vsi command.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the VSI driver on the control interface:

Router(config)# interface atm 0/0
Router(config-if)# tag-control-protocol vsi base-vc 0 51

The following example enables extended NAK support:

Router(config-if)# tag-control-protocol vsi nak extended

The following example shows that extended NAK support is enabled, as shown by the bold output:

Router# show running-config interface atm0/0

Building configuration...
Current configuration : 113 bytes
interface ATM0/0
 no ip address
 shutdown
 label-control-protocol vsi nak extended
 no atm ilmi-keepalive
end 

The show controllers vsi session command also indicates that extended NAK support is enabled, as shown by the bold output:

Router# show controllers vsi session

Interface    Session  VCD    VPI/VCI    Switch/Slave Ids   Session State       
ATM0/0       0        1      0/40       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       1        2      0/41       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       2        3      0/42       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       3        4      0/43       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       4        5      0/44       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       5        6      0/45       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       6        7      0/46       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       7        8      0/47       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       8        9      0/48       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       9        10     0/49       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       10       11     0/50       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       11       12     0/51       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       12       13     0/52       0/0                UNKNOWN             
ATM0/0       13       14     0/53       0/0                UNKNOWN             
Extended NAK support is enabled on LSC

Glossary


The terms in this glossary are defined in an MPLS context, rather than a general usage context.

AIP—ATM Interface Processor. An ATM interface for Cisco 7000 series routers designed to minimize performance bottlenecks at the user-network interface (UNI).

Alien Port AdapterA dual-wide port adapter for the Cisco 7200 router. The Alien Port Adapter is ABR-ready and supports traffic shaping.

ATM Edge LSR—A router that is connected to the ATM-LSR cloud through LSC-ATM interfaces. The ATM Edge LSR adds labels to unlabeled packets and strips labels from labeled packets.

ATM Lite—Entry-level port adapter (higher performance than the AIP) for 7200 routers. The ATM Lite does not support traffic shaping or ABR.

ATM-LSR—A label switch router with several LSC-ATM interfaces. The router forwards the cells among these interfaces using labels carried in the VPI/VCI field of the cells.

BPX—Broadband Packet Exchange. A carrier-quality switch with trunk and CPU hot standby redundancy.

BXM—Broadband Switch Module. An ATM port card for the Cisco BPX switch.

CAR—committed access rate. CAR is the main feature supporting packet classification. CAR uses the type of service (ToS) bits in the IP header to classify packets. You can use the CAR classification commands to classify and reclassify a packet.

Controlled ATM Switch—An ATM switch that is controlled by an LSC.

CoS—class of service. A feature that provides scalable, differentiated types of service across an MPLS network.

downstream on demand—Indicates that the downstream-on-demand method of label distribution is being used for this LDP session. When the downstream-on-demand method is used, an LSR advertises its locally assigned (incoming) labels to its LDP peer device only when the peer device asks for them.

DWFQ—VIP-Distributed WFQ (weighted fair queuing).

DWRED—VIP-Distributed WRED (weighted random early detection).

extended label ATM interface—A type of interface supported by the remote ATM switch driver and a particular switch-specific driver that supports MPLS over an ATM interface on a remotely controlled switch.

external ATM interface—One of the interfaces on the controlled ATM switch other than the switch control port. It is also referred to as an exposed ATM interface, because it is available for connections outside of the label-controlled switch.

IP Precedence—A 3-bit value in the type of service (ToS) byte used for assigning precedence to IP packets.

label—A short fixed-length label that tells switching nodes how the data (packets or cells) should be forwarded.

label controlled switch—The label switch controller and the controlled ATM switch that it controls, viewed together as a unit.

label imposition—The act of putting the first label on a packet.

label switch—A node that forwards units of data (packets or cells) on the basis of labels.

LBR—label bit rate. Service category defined by this document for label-VC traffic. Link and per-VC bandwidth sharing may be controlled by relative bandwidth configuration at the edge and each switch along a label-VC. No ATM traffic-related parameters specified.

LC-ATM (label-controlled ATM) interface—An MPLS interface in which labels are carried in the VPI or VCI fields of the ATM cells and in which VC connections are established under the control of MPLS software.

LFIB—Label forwarding information base. A data structure and way of managing forwarding in which destinations and incoming labels are associated with outgoing interfaces and labels.

LSC—label switch controller. A Cisco IOS platform that runs the generic MPLS software and that can control the operation of an external ATM (or other type of) switch, making the interfaces of the latter appear externally as XtagATM interfaces.

LSP—label switched path. A configured connection between two routers, using MPLS to carry the packets.

LSR—label switching router. A Layer 3 router that forwards a packet based on the value of a label encapsulated in the packet.

LVC—label virtual circuit. A virtual circuit (VC) established under the control of MPLS. An LVC is neither a PVC nor an SVC. The LVC must traverse only a single hop in a label-switched path (LSP), but the LVC may traverse several ATM hops only if the LVC exists within a VP tunnel.

master control port—A physical interface on an MPLS LSC that is connected to one end of a slave control link.

MPLS—Multiprotocol Label Switching. An emerging industry standard on which label switching is based.

PNNI—Private Network-Network Interface.

PVC—permanent virtual circuit (or connection). A virtual circuit that is permanently established. PVCs save bandwidth associated with circuit establishment and tear down in situations where certain virtual circuits must exist all the time. In ATM terminology, called a permanent virtual connection. Compare with SVC. See also virtual circuit.

PVP—permanent virtual path. A virtual path that consists of PVCs. See also PVC and virtual path.

QoS—quality of service. A measurement of performance for a transmission system that reflects its transmission quality and service availability.

RED—random early detection. Congestion avoidance algorithm in which a small percentage of packets are dropped when congestion is detected and before the queue in question overflows completely.

remote ATM switch driver—A set of interfaces that allows Cisco IOS software to control the operation of a remote ATM switch through a control protocol, such VSI.

ships in the night mode—The ability to support both MPLS functions and ATM forum protocols on the same physical interface, or on the same router or switch platform. In this mode, the two protocol stacks operate independently.

Switch control port—An interface that uses an MPLS LSC to control the operation of a controlled ATM switch (for example, VSI). The protocol runs on an ATM link.

SVC—switched virtual circuit. Virtual circuit that is dynamically established on demand and is torn down when transmission is complete. SVCs are used in situations where data transmission is sporadic. See also virtual circuit. Called a switched virtual connection in ATM terminology. Compare with PVC.

ToS—type of service. A byte in the IPv4 header.

VCC—virtual channel connection. Logical circuit, made up of VCLs, that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. Sometimes called a virtual circuit connection. See also VCL and VPI.

VCI—virtual channel identifier. 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VCI, together with the VPI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. ATM switches use the VPI/VCI fields to identify the next network VCL that a cell needs to transit on its way to its final destination. The function of the VCI is similar to that of the DLCI in Frame Relay. Compare with DLCI.

VCL—virtual channel link. A connection between two ATM devices.

virtual circuit—Logical circuit created to ensure reliable communication between two network devices. A virtual circuit is defined by a VPI/VCI pair, and can be either permanent (PVC) or switched (SVC). Virtual circuits are used in Frame Relay and X.25. In ATM, a virtual circuit is called a virtual channel. Sometimes abbreviated VC.

VNNI—Virtual Network-Network Interface.

VPC—virtual path connection. Grouping of VCCs that share one or more contiguous VPL. See also VCC and VPL.

VPI—virtual path identifier. An 8-bit field in the header of an ATM cell. The VPI, together with the VCI, is used to identify the next destination of a cell as it passes through a series of ATM switches on its way to its destination. ATM switches use the VPI/VCI fields to identify the next VCL that a cell needs to transit on its way to its final destination. The function of the VPI is similar to that of the DLCI in Frame Relay.

VPN—virtual private network. A network that enables IP traffic to use tunneling to travel securely over a public TCP/IP network.

VSI—Virtual Switch Interface. The protocol that enables an MPLS LSC to control an ATM switch over an ATM link.

VSI master—A VSI master process implementing the master side of the VSI protocol in a VSI controller. Sometimes the whole VSI controller is referred to as a "VSI Master," but this is not strictly correct.

1. A device that controls a VSI switch, for example, a VSI Label Switch Controller.

2. A process implementing the master side of the VSI protocol.

VSI slave—A VSI slave is either of the following definitions:

1. A switch (in the "Single Slave model") or a port card (in the "Multiple Slave Model") that implements the VSI.

2. A process implementing the slave side of the VSI protocol.

WEPD—Weighted Early Packet Discard. A variant of EPD used by some ATM switches for discarding a complete AAL5 frame when a threshold condition, such as imminent congestion, is met. EPD prevents congestion that would otherwise jeopardize the ability of the switch to properly support existing connections with a guaranteed service.

WRED—weighted random early detection. A variant of RED in which the probability of a packet being dropped depends on its IP Precedence, CAR marking, or MPLS CoS (as well as other factors in the RED algorithm).

WFQ—weighted fair queuing. A queue management algorithm that provides a certain fraction of link bandwidth to each of several queues, based on relative bandwidth applied to each of the queues.